JP2018011754A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing presentation effect.SOLUTION: A plurality of successive frame images is sequentially acquired as moving images that can be acquired by imaging a game area and positions of game balls included in each frame image are specified. On the basis of a position of one game ball included in each frame image, an image is projected on the one game ball or on a game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 104

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, identification information is displayed on the display area of the variable display device when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when the game ball has passed through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Variable display control means is provided for performing variable display control and performing control for deriving and displaying identification information for which variable display is being performed, which is advantageous to the player when the identification information that is derived and displayed has a predetermined combination. 2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines are known that are designed to shift to a big hit game state (so-called “hit”).

  A technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by photographing a game ball rolling in a game area in such a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by the photographing is known ( Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-237864 A

  However, in the conventional techniques as described above, there are insufficient ideas for reflecting the tracking result of the game ball in the effect, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the production effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) a game board (eg, game board 12) having a game area (eg, game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, projector unit B);
A photographing device (for example, a CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
As a moving image obtained by shooting the game area, frame image acquisition means for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31);
Position specifying means for specifying the position of a game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (for example, the sub CPU 201 executing the processing of steps S284 to S286 in FIG. 31);
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the projection is performed on the one game ball or the game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball. Image projection means for projecting an image by the apparatus (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of FIG. 104);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the invention of (1), a plurality of consecutive frame images are sequentially acquired as moving images obtained by shooting the game area, and the position of the game ball included in each frame image is specified. Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, an image is projected onto the one game ball or a game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball. As a result, the synergy between the game ball and the video can create a visual effect that is not found in conventional game machines, and can produce a novel effect.

(2) The gaming machine of (1),
The image projection means includes
In accordance with the movement of the one game ball, the projected position of the image is changed over time.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (2), since the projected position of the video changes with time according to the movement of the game ball, it is possible to link the movement of the game ball and the projected video, which is more attractive. Can be performed.

  According to the present invention, the production effect can be enhanced.

It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the functional flow of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the range image | photographed with a CCD camera. It is a figure which shows the range image | photographed with a CCD camera. 1 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement (generation | generation operation | movement of various requests) outline | summary at the time of animation request construction. (A) is a signal flow figure at the time of speaker drive (sound reproduction). (B) is a signal flow diagram at the time of LED driving (lighting / extinguishing). It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot kind determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize detection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction and the probability variation subtraction process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end interval process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub control circuit main process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the button input interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the operation means input process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation aspect determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the camera image | video analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the image before performing projective transformation. (B) is a figure which shows the image after performing projective transformation. It is a figure which shows an example of a moving average filter. It is a figure which shows an example of a weighted average filter. It is a conceptual diagram of the difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls in a game area | region. It is a figure which shows the process of obtaining a difference image (1) from the frame image image | photographed at the time T1, and the frame image image | photographed at the time T2. It is a figure which shows the process of obtaining a difference image (2) from the frame image image | photographed at the time T2, and the frame image image | photographed at the time T3. It is a figure which shows the process in which the game ball in the time T2 is extracted from a difference image (1) and a difference image (2). It is a figure which shows a masking area | region. It is a figure which shows the injection | emission area | region and the discharge | emission area | region. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating allocation of ID with respect to a game ball. (A) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in the time T2. (B) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in the time T3. It is a flowchart which shows the game media tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the search range on the basis of the position of the game ball in time T2. (A) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in the time T2. (B) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in the time T3. It is a figure which shows the search range on the basis of the position of the game ball in time T2. It is a figure which shows a mode that the ball blockage has generate | occur | produced with the some game ball on the game board. It is a flowchart which shows the process which concerns on the clogging / disappearance detection performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the area | region of a loss | disappearance point and a loss | disappearance detection. (B) is a figure which shows a mode that the ball clogging occurred. (C) is a figure for demonstrating the overlap of game balls, and the area | region of overlap detection. It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the example of an external appearance structure in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an internal structure of a pachislot gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, with a middle door closed. 1 is a perspective view showing an internal structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, with a middle door opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface side of the front door in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the movement path | route of a medal when a medal selector guides a medal to a hopper apparatus. It is a block block diagram of the whole circuit with which the pachislot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit of the pachislot gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the sub-control circuit of the pachislot gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main process performed in the pachislot gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main process performed in the pachislot gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process performed in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the communication data transmission process performed in the pachislot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the demo command transmission process performed in the pachislot machine based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of a roulette device. It is a flowchart which shows the game media tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the magnitude | size of the game ball in a ball | bowl position image. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the magnitude | size of the game ball in a ball | bowl position image, and the breadth of a search range. It is a figure which shows a search range setting table. It is a flowchart which shows the game media tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game media tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example in case a search range is expanded. It is a figure which shows an example in case a search range is expanded. It is a flowchart which shows the game media tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game media tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram of the difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a figure which shows the process of obtaining the AND image of a difference image (1) and a difference image (2). FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a process of extracting a game ball at time T2 from the AND image and the effect LED single image obtained in FIG. 74. It is a conceptual diagram of the difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a figure which shows the process of obtaining the image of the 2nd frame other than production LED. It is a figure which shows the process of obtaining a difference image (1) from the image of the 2nd frame other than production LED, and the image of the 1st frame. It is a figure which shows the process of obtaining a difference image (2) from the image of 2nd frame other than production LED, and the image of 3rd frame. It is a conceptual diagram of the difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a flowchart which shows the process which concerns on the clogging / disappearance detection performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating a ball clogging mark. It is a figure for demonstrating the area | region of a ball clogging elimination detection. It is a flowchart which shows the process which concerns on the clogging / disappearance detection performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process which concerns on the clogging elimination detection performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the area | region of a ball clogging elimination detection. It is a flowchart which shows the camera image | video analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process which concerns on the error determination regarding the ball | bowl movement performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the moving distance of a game ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure for implement | achieving V prize. It is a figure which shows the vicinity area | region of the cron and stage contained in the image image | photographed with the CCD camera. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation aspect determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a mode that the discharge area is set with respect to the specific area and the non-specific area. It is a figure which shows an effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball moves on a croon. (B) is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls on the stage. It is a figure which shows an effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a mode that the discharge | emission area | region is set with respect to the ball path. 1 is a partially exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the projector unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation aspect determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the projector projection content determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect using a projector. It is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic side view which shows the state projected on a projection area | region from a projection means.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the pachinko game is a game in which game ball payout control processing is performed when a game ball is fired by a user's operation and the game ball wins various prizes. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When it is a “hit” in a special symbol game or a “hit” in a normal symbol game, the probability that a game ball will win is relatively increased, and the game ball payout control process is more likely to be performed. Become.

  In addition, for various winnings, there is a special symbol start winning, which is one condition for the variable symbol display in the special symbol game, and a single condition for the variable symbol normal symbol display in the normal symbol game. Some regular symbol starting prizes are also included.

  In this specification, “variable display” is a concept that can be displayed in a variable manner. For example, “variable display” that is actually changed and “stop display” that is actually stopped and displayed. Is possible.

  Further, in the “variable display”, for example, “derivation display” in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game can be performed. In other words, in this specification, the operation from the start of “variable display” to “derivative display” is referred to as one “variable display”.

  Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described.

  (1) When there is a special symbol start winning in the special symbol game, random numbers (a jackpot determination random number value and a symbol determination random number value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 1).

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by a special symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is established with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when the variable symbol special display is started, the jackpot determination random number extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to and a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot determination is made. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the counter for symbol determination and the result of the jackpot determination described above.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determining counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, effect pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol for the stop display described above, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

  Then, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special display to be stopped, the special pattern variation pattern, and the effect pattern associated with the special symbol variable display are referred to, and the variable display control processing for controlling the special symbol variable display And the effect control process which performs a predetermined effect is performed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “big hit” is reached. In this determination process, if it is determined that a “hit” is reached, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been reached, the big hit game control process is not executed.

  When it is determined that the game is not “big hit”, or when the big hit game control process is completed, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this gaming state transition control process, management of the gaming state in a normal time different from the big hit gaming state is performed.

  As a normal gaming state, for example, in the jackpot determination described above, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a “big hit” (hereinafter referred to as “probability changing gaming state”) or a special symbol start winning is likely to be obtained. A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “short-time gaming state”). Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start variable symbol special display is performed again, and thereafter, the various types of special symbol control processing described above are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, when a game ball wins a start during special symbol variation display, various data acquired at the time of the start win (a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, etc. ) Is put on hold.

  In other words, if a game ball wins a start during a special symbol variation display, the special symbol variable display (variation display) corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The variable display of the special symbol that is put on hold is started. Hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol that is on hold is also referred to as “holding ball”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get a hold ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is not shown in FIG. 1, it determines the winning of the holding ball (whether or not “big hit” is won) based on the information of the holding ball described above, and further, the determination result A function for performing a predetermined effect based on the above, that is, a prefetch effect function may be provided.

  (2) When there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random number value is stored (the normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 1). (See processing flow).

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when starting normal symbol variable display, the random number value extracted from the counter for hit determination is referred to and a hit determination is made as to whether or not “win” is set. Thereafter, variation pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

  Next, referring to the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol, a variable display control process for controlling variable display of the normal symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “winning” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that “winning” is achieved, a winning game control process for performing a winning game is executed.

  In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings as described above, in particular, the possibility of special symbol start winning of a game ball in a special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be “winning”, the winning game control process is not executed. Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball depends on the conditions such as whether or not the game is a “hit” in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the game is the “hit” in the normal symbol game. The ease of processing changes.

  In this embodiment, as a random number extraction method, a soft random number method for generating random values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a pachinko machine includes a random number generator whose random number is updated at a predetermined period, a random number value is determined from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the random number may be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random values.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in a predetermined period by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined period.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is forward, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is backward, and the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is left. Direction, the right side when viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the right direction, the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is upward, the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front Is a clockwise direction, and conversely, a counterclockwise direction is a counterclockwise direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 2, and a glass door that can be opened and closed with respect to the base door 3. 4.

[Main unit]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 4). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape that is substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 around one side edge of the main body 2, the base door 3 The opening 2a is opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3 a. The opening 3a is formed from the substantially central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and has a size that occupies most of the region.

  A speaker 11, a game board 12, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout unit 16, and a board unit 17 can be attached to the base door 3. A liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the game board 12. Note that the liquid crystal display device 13 may not be attached to the game board 12 but may be disposed on the back side of the game board 12 with a space between the game board 12 and the game board 12.

  The speaker 11 is disposed on the upper part (near the upper end) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is disposed in front of the base door 3 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and is disposed so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light permeability. In addition, as resin which has a light transmittance, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacryl resin etc. can be used, for example.

  In addition, a game area 12a in which a game ball fired from the launching device 15 rolls is formed on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail (specifically, an outer rail 41a (not shown) surrounding an opening 4a of a glass door 4 described later), and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially circular.

  Further, a plurality of game nails (not shown) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13 a is set so as to occupy a partial area on the surface of the game board 12. The size of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 may be a size that occupies the entire area of the surface of the game board 12.

  In the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an effect identification symbol (decoration symbol), an effect image, and an ornamental image are displayed. The player can view various images displayed on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

  In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) ) A display device such as a display may be applied.

  A spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the game board 12 (surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). A space serving as a flow path of the game ball rolling in the game area 12a is formed.

  The spacer 19 is made of a light transmissive material. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the spacer 19 may be partially formed of a light-transmitting material or may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material. .

  The dish unit 14 is disposed below the game board 12. The dish unit 14 includes an upper dish 21 and a lower dish 22 disposed below the upper dish 21. The upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are formed with a payout port 21a and a payout port 22a for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively.

  When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout opening 21a or the payout opening 22a, and the discharged game balls are stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are launched into the game area 12 a by the launching device 15.

  The plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is attached on the upper plate 21. A jog dial 24 is attached to the periphery of the effect button 23 so as to be rotatable with respect to the effect button 23.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function that is performed using at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24. When performing a predetermined effect, the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is used. In addition, an image prompting the operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24 is displayed.

  The launcher 15 is disposed in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, a solenoid actuator for controlling the launching operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Although not shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, a touch sensor is provided at the peripheral portion of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the launch handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. Thereby, it is detected that the player has gripped the launch handle 25, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator.

  When the player holds the firing handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (when viewed from the player side), the resistance of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. The electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided to the guide rail and discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, a firing stop button is provided on the side of the firing handle 25. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the launch stop button, the launch of the game ball is stopped even when the launch handle 25 is gripped and rotated.

  The dispensing unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition.

  The board unit 17 has various control boards. Various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub-control circuit 200, a payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like described later (see FIG. 8 described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is formed in a rectangular frame shape. The glass door 4 is disposed on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, an upper decoration unit 58 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11. The upper decoration unit 58 is disposed so as to protrude forward of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4 a having a size that exposes at least the game area 12 a is formed in an area facing the game area 12 a of the game board 12. The opening 4a of the glass door 4 is attached with a protective glass 28 having a light transmission property, thereby closing the opening 4a.

  Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is disposed so as to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12. As shown in FIG. 2, electrical decoration covers 58 </ b> A to 58 </ b> C are provided at the left and right ends and the lower end of the opening 4 a of the glass door 4. LED (Light Emitting Diode) 59A-59C (refer FIG. 8) is provided in the rear surface of the electrical decoration covers 58A-58C. The LEDs 59A to 59C are controlled so as to be lit or blinking in conjunction with the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, the effect buttons, the light emission of the electrical decoration covers 58A and 58B, and the like.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

  On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first start port 44, a second start port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory 46, Is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, general winning holes 51 and 52, a first big winning hole 53, a second big winning hole 54, an out opening 55, and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are provided.

  Further, a bulge cover (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the second big prize opening 54 on the front surface of the game board 12, and the bulge cover bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 12. Hereinafter, the front of the game board 12 represents the player side with respect to the game board 12, and the rear of the game board 12 represents the opposite side to the player side with respect to the game board 12. Further, the right side and the left side with respect to the game board 12 represent the right side and the left side when the game board 12 is viewed from the front. Therefore, when the game board 12 is viewed from the rear, the right side of the game board 12 is the left side and the left side of the game board 12 is the right side in the drawing.

  Further, on the front side of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special display are displayed at the lower right portion. A symbol hold display device 65 is provided (reference numerals are omitted in FIG. 5A and refer to FIG. 8).

  In the present embodiment, a notification LED that is turned on when the result of the special symbol stop display is “big hit”, a round number display LED that shows the number of rounds in the big hit game, and the like may be provided.

[Various components of game area]
The guide rail 41 extends in an arc shape so as to divide the game area 12a, and an outer rail 41a (not shown) that surrounds the opening 4a of the glass door 4 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 5A), and the outer rail 41a. And an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape.

  The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are disposed so as to face each other in the vicinity of the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, and thereby, between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b, A guide path 41c for guiding the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

  In addition, a ball discharge port 41d is formed at the tip of the inner rail 41b located at the upper left portion of the game area 12a by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip. And the ball | bowl return prevention piece 42 is provided in the front-end | tip part of the inner rail 41b so that the ball | bowl discharge port 41d may be plugged up.

  The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

  The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part of the game area 12a toward the lower part. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game region 12a such as a plurality of game nails, the first start port 44, the second start port 45, etc., and changes the traveling direction of the upper part of the game region 12a. It flows down from the bottom to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over an area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

  The ball passage detector 43 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the first big winning opening 53 on the right side of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passage ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a passing game ball. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the normal symbol game is “winning”, and the normal symbol variation display is started based on the result of the lottery.

  The first start port 44 is disposed below the display area 13 a, and the second start port 45 is disposed below the first start port 44. The 1st starting opening 44 and the 2nd starting opening 45 are comprised by the member which can receive a game ball.

  Hereinafter, a game ball entering or passing through the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is referred to as “winning”. When the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 44, a lottery for determining whether or not it is a “big hit” and a lottery for determining whether or not it is a “small hit” are performed. Based on the results of the lottery, The variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, when a game ball enters the second start opening 45, a lottery for determining whether or not the game is a “big hit” is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as special figure 1 and special figure 2, respectively.

  The first start opening 44 is provided with a first start opening winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a winning game ball. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 pass through a recovery port (not shown) provided in the game board 12 and are conveyed to a game ball recovery unit (not shown). .

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second start opening 45. The normal electric accessory 46 is a blade-like member that opens and closes so as to be tilted forward and backward in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is an opening that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start opening 45. It is configured to be able to switch between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the second start opening 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven to open and close by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a (see FIG. 8 described later).

  In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in a closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. Also good. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is not limited to one that operates to open and close the blade-shaped member in the front-rear direction, and for example, a so-called electric motor that widens the start port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. It may be a tulip type or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the starting port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left part of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 52 is disposed on the right side of the ball passage detector 43 and is disposed near the lower right portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

  The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are configured by members capable of receiving game balls. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “winning” that the game ball enters or passes through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls are paid out.

  The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 51a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a winning game ball. The general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 52a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the general winning opening 52.

  The first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and to the right of the first start opening 44 and the first start opening 45. The first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first big prize opening 53 is arranged above the second big prize opening 54.

  Both the first grand prize winning port 53 and the second grand prize winning port 54 are so-called attacker-type opening / closing devices, and shutters 53a and 54a that can be opened and closed, and solenoid actuators (to be described later) that drive the shutters 53a and 54a. 8 has a first big prize opening solenoid 53b and a second big prize opening solenoid 54b).

  Each of the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 receives a game ball when the corresponding shutter 53a, 54a is open (open state), and the shutter is closed (closed state). At that time, the game ball is not accepted.

  In the following, it is also referred to as “winning” that a game ball enters or passes through the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54. When a game ball wins the first big prize opening 53, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins the second grand prize opening 54, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The first grand prize opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 8 described later) for counting the number of game balls won. Further, the second grand prize opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 5A and FIG. 8 described later) for counting the winning game balls.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first grand prize opening 53 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large width dimension so that a plurality of game balls can be won simultaneously. The second large winning opening 54 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the bulging cover (not shown) as an opening having a relatively small size so that game balls can be won one by one.

  The shutter 53a corresponding to the first grand prize winning port 53 is opened and closed so as to have a forward tilting / retreating posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, thereby switching the first grand prize winning port 53 to an open state or a closed state. It is a thing and is arrange | positioned so that the 1st big winning opening 53 may be covered in a closed state. That is, the shutter 53a has a first big prize opening solenoid 53b so that the shutter 53a changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 53 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. (See FIG. 8 described later).

  The shutter 54a corresponding to the second big prize opening 54 switches the second big prize opening 54 to an open state or a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and in the closed state, It is arranged so as to cover the winning opening 54. In other words, the shutter 54a has a second big prize opening solenoid 54b so that the shutter 54a changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 54 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. (See FIG. 8 described later).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the specific area 38A and the non-specific area through which the game ball detected by the count sensor 54c after passing through the second big prize opening 54 can be passed inside the bulge cover. 38B is provided. The ball path of the game ball from the second big prize opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the bulging cover. The game ball that has won the second grand prize opening 54 passes through one of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B, and is then led to the back of the game board 1 and collected. A count sensor 54c is disposed in the middle of the ball path from the second big prize opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area sensor 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the passage of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A non-specific area sensor 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area sensor 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided near the specific region 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to an open state or a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 is moved by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 8 described later) so that the displacement is changed between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 38A and a closed state in which the passage is impossible or difficult. Driven. When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, a game ball that cannot pass through the specific area 38A passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  Hereinafter, the passing of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V winning”. In addition, the second big prize opening 54 provided with the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V attacker”. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state that has succeeded in the V winning is finished, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probability changing gaming state. For this reason, the V prize may be referred to as “V certainty”. The displacement member 39 may be referred to as “V Bello”.

  In addition, as a structure for implement | achieving V prize, it is good also as a structure as shown in FIG.5 (b). That is, a ball passage for guiding a game ball downward is formed inside the second grand prize opening 54, and a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are adjacent to the left and right at the lower end of the ball path. Is provided. A count sensor 54c is disposed at a position entering the ball path from the second big prize opening 54. A specific area sensor 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A non-specific area sensor 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area sensor 380B. A displacement member 39 that can be turned to the left and right is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B in the ball passage. As for the displacement member 39, the attitude | position shown by a continuous line is an open attitude | position after a displacement, and the position shown by a virtual line is a normal closed attitude | position.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific region 38A to an open state or a closed state. When the displacing member 39 is in the open posture indicated by the solid line, the specific area 38A is opened, and the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is made easy. At this time, the displacement member 39 guides the game ball to the specific area 38A on the right side of the ball passage. As a result, the game ball guided from the second grand prize opening 54 to the ball passage becomes a V prize by passing through the specific area 38A. Further, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed posture indicated by the phantom line, the specific area 38A is in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult to win a V-winning game ball in the specific area 38A. The game ball is guided to the non-specific area 38B on the left side. Thereby, the game ball guided from the second grand prize opening 54 to the ball passage passes through the non-specific area 38B without passing through the specific area 38A. Even with such a configuration, a V prize can be realized. When the count sensor 54c detects the passing of the game ball, the game ball is paid out. Based on the signals from the count sensor 54c, the specific area sensor 380A, and the non-specific area sensor 380B, the game ball is discharged from the second big prize opening 54. It may be determined whether or not the game ball has been discharged (whether or not the game ball remains in the second big prize opening 54).

  The out port 55 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area 12a. The out port 55 receives game balls that have not won any of the first start port 44, the second start port 45, the general winning ports 51 and 52, the first big winning port 53, and the second big winning port 54. .

  When the arrangement of the various components in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 5A, a game ball is thrown into the right area of the game area 12a by the player (so-called right-handed ), The game ball is guided to the second start opening 45 by a game nail or the like.

  In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first start opening 44. In the present embodiment, the winner of the second start opening 45 is more likely to receive a “hit” lottery that is advantageous to the player than when the first start opening 44 is won.

  Therefore, in the so-called “short-time gaming state” in which winning to the second starting port 45 is relatively easy, the possibility of winning to the first starting port 44 (a game that is disadvantageous to the player) is achieved by making a right turn. The possibility of becoming a state) can be reduced.

  The bulging cover is provided below the first big prize opening 53, and the upper surface of the bulging cover is formed as an inclined surface. This inclined surface is inclined downwardly from the upper right to the lower left as viewed from the player side. The inclined surface guides the game ball flowing down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a to the second big prize opening 54, and the game ball rolling on the inclined surface collides with a rib or the like (not shown). Then, the speed of the game ball decreases, and it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second big winning port 54 in which the shutter 54a is in the open state.

  Moreover, as shown to Fig.5 (a), the illumination cover 58E-58H is provided in the circumference | surroundings of the display area 13a of the game board 12, and LED59e-59h (FIG. 5) is provided on the rear surface of the illumination cover 58E-58H. 8). The illumination covers 58E to 58H display effects by turning on or blinking the LEDs 59e to 59h.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of liquid crystal, and displays various effects in the display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to (corresponding to) a special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 described later is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61, except for specific cases, for example, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorations) composed of numbers 1 to 8, various characters, etc. (Design) is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is “big hit”), the player can grasp that it is “big hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

  As an effect for causing the player to grasp that it is a “hit”, for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction) After that, there is an effect of displaying an image for informing the “big hit”.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the effect image relevant to the display content of the 1st special symbol reservation display apparatus 64 mentioned later and the 2nd special symbol reservation display apparatus 65 is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. FIG. For example, the display area 13a displays hold information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holdings) for notifying the number of holdings for variable display of special symbols. In addition, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a pre-reading effect is performed based on the information on the reserved ball of the special symbol, and a notice of notification at this time is also displayed in the display area 13a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a normal symbol stopped and displayed on a normal symbol display device 62 to be described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp the information is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. You may provide further the function displayed on.

[Special symbol display device]
The special symbol display device 61 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays special symbols (variable display and stop display) in a special symbol game. In the present embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a 7-segment display that displays special symbols as symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise the special symbol display apparatus 61 by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the special symbol (identification information) when the game ball has won the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs the special symbol stop display after performing the variable symbol special symbol display for a predetermined time.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. The special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (“big hit” mode), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the big hit gaming state which is a state.

  That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is “big hit” that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the first big winning port 53 or the second big winning port 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the first big winning opening 53 becomes an open state.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the second big winning port 54 is opened.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And if the elapsed period of the open state of each big prize opening satisfy | fills any of these conditions, the big prize opening which was the open state will be in a closed state.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the first grand prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept a game ball is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the big prize opening is closed.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of “losing”), the gaming state does not shift except when the falling lottery is won.

  That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44 while the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, the variable of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called “holding number (the number of holding balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start opening 45 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (holding number) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of variable symbols to be held is 8 at the maximum.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variation display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the reservation ball | bowl of a 1st special symbol and the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol coexist, you may make it perform the change display of a special symbol in the order kept.

[Normal symbol display device]
The normal symbol display device 62 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays a normal symbol (variation display and stop display) in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display device 62 includes a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). . In the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern constituted by turning on / off each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol by turning on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs the normal symbol stop display after performing the normal symbol variation display for a predetermined time.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (a “win” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

  That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 62, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the normal symbol variation display, the normal symbol variable display is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable symbols of the normal symbol to be held (that is, the “holding number”) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of hold of the variable symbol variable display. The normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs. Each normal symbol hold display LED is turned on / off to display the number of normal symbols variable display hold.

  Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays a normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of normal symbols variable display hold, and the normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of normal symbols variable display hold. Up to four lights.

[First special symbol hold display device]
The first special symbol hold display device 64 is arranged in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information related to variable display of the first special symbol being held (the hold ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold display device 64 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of variable display hold of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special symbol hold display LED. A maximum of four lights are turned on according to the number of reserved symbols in the variable display.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display device 65 is disposed in the lower right part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information related to variable display of the second special symbol being held (the hold ball of the second special symbol), and there are a plurality of second special symbol hold display devices 65. The second special symbol hold display LED is provided.

  Specifically, the second special symbol hold display device 65 displays the second special symbol hold display LED according to the number of variable display hold of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED is the second special symbol hold display LED. A maximum of four lights are turned on according to the number of reserved special symbols.

[CCD camera]
6 and 7 are diagrams showing a range photographed by the CCD camera.

  FIG. 6 is a partially cutaway side view (schematic diagram) of a pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 6, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a CCD camera 1000 is disposed on the back side of the upper decoration unit 58. The CCD camera 1000 is attached to the upper rear part of the glass door 4 and is positioned in front of the game board 12 when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3. As a result, the front surface of the game board 12 can be photographed using the CCD camera 1000.

  In FIGS. 6 and 7, the range captured by the CCD camera 1000 is indicated by a thick line. FIG. 7 shows a state where the range photographed by the CCD camera 1000 is viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 7, the CCD camera 1000 can shoot with a relatively wide angle of view θ (viewing angle), and most of the game board 12 is included in the shooting range. In particular, the game area 12a formed on the game board 12 is all included in the shooting range. Therefore, the image shot by the CCD camera 1000 includes a game ball that rolls in the game area 12a.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, the configuration of various circuits provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls game operations, a sub-control circuit 200 that controls performance operations according to the progress of the game, and mainly game balls. A payout / launch control circuit 300 for performing control related to payout and launching.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory: Read Write Memory is abbreviated as “RWM”) 73. The main control circuit 70 also includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery process is performed when the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is won, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables, and the like.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 functions as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the main CPU 71 for various processes.

  In this embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium. .

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process to be described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Is done.

  Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 performs operation control of variable symbol special display in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  The main control circuit 70 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 46a, a first big prize opening solenoid 53b, and a second big prize opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first big prize opening solenoid 53b and the second big prize opening solenoid 54b, respectively, so that the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are opened or closed. To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals of the various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count sensors 53c and 54c, general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, a passing ball sensor 43a, a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a and a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a, The area sensor 380A, the non-specific area sensor 380B, the backup clear switch 121, and the like are connected.

  The count sensor 53 c counts the game balls that have won the first grand prize opening 53 and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54 c counts the game balls that have won the second grand prize opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

  The general winning ball sensor 51 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the general winning opening 51. The general winning ball sensor 52 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the general winning opening 52.

  The passing ball sensor 43 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43.

  The first start port winning ball sensor 44 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the first start port 44. The second start opening winning ball sensor 45 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45.

  The specific area sensor 380A outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. The non-specific area sensor 380B outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  The backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout / launch control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation of a game shop manager or the like at the time of power interruption. .

  The main control circuit 70 is connected with a payout / launch control circuit 300. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that a game ball has won a prize at the above-mentioned various start-up openings and various prize-winning openings.

  The main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of prize balls determined as described above to the payout / firing control circuit 300 as a prize ball control command.

[Discharge / Launch Control Circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a microcomputer such as a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. A payout device 170 is connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the microcomputer of the payout / fire control circuit 300 controls, for example, a payout operation of a game ball by the payout device 170.

  In addition, to the payout / launch control circuit 300, a launching device 15 for launching a game ball, an external terminal board 140, and a card unit 150 are connected. A data display 141 is connected to the external terminal board 140, and a lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

  Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of rented balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that the lending operation unit 151 described above is operated.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the solenoid actuator of the launching device 15 according to the turning angle when the launching handle 25 is gripped by the player and is turned clockwise. . Thereby, the launching device 15 performs control to launch the game ball.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, as an incidental facility for a hall in the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function for calling a hall attendant and a function for displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting lending of game balls to the card unit 150. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined lending ball number to the dispensing / launching control circuit 300.

  The payout / launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a lending ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 170. To do. As a result, the payout device 170 pays out the game ball.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. The sub-control circuit 200 controls display on the liquid crystal display device 13, control on sound generated from the speaker 11, control of LEDs 59A to 59E, 59e to 59h, according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. Control of the production operation using various kinds of accessories.

  That is, the sub-control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the present embodiment, a signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. It may be provided with various configurations.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, an LED control circuit 207, and a drive control circuit 208. . A program ROM 202, work RAM 203, display control circuit 205, audio control circuit 206, LED control circuit 207, and drive control circuit 208 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

  The program ROM 202 stores various programs for controlling the presentation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201 and various data tables. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium provided with a control means. For example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, etc. The storage medium may be applied.

  In addition, each program may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Furthermore, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside after power-on and recorded in the main RAM 73, the work RAM 203, or the like.

  The work RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the sub CPU 201 for various processes. In this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium.

  The display control circuit 205 performs control to display an image related to the effect on the liquid crystal display device 13. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

  The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. The D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

  The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 205 also displays images such as decorative design image data, background image data, and presentation image data indicating a decorative design (production identification design) based on the production designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201. Data is temporarily stored in the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The audio control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC that performs control related to audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  The sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the read audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies it to the AMP. In addition, the AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 11.

  The LED control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, an LED data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED lighting patterns are stored, and the like. Based on the production designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201, the drive circuit selects one LED lighting / flashing pattern from a plurality of lighting / flashing patterns stored in the LED data ROM. Thereby, LED59 (59A-59E, 59e-59h) lights or blinks according to a lighting / flashing pattern.

  The drive control circuit 208 drives an effect drive motor 60 for operating various accessories based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  In addition, an effect button switch 230 that detects that the effect button 23 has been pressed and a jog dial switch 240 that detects the rotation direction and operation amount when the jog dial 24 is rotated are connected to the sub control circuit 200. Is done. The sub CPU 201 performs control so that a predetermined effect display is performed in response to a detection signal (input signal) from the effect button switch 230 or the jog dial switch 240.

  In addition, a CCD camera 1000 is connected to the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 201 performs various processes on the image data input by the CCD camera 1000.

  Such a sub-control circuit 200 displays a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 13 and generates an effect by generating sound from the speaker 11 or lighting or blinking the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h. Make it. The sub-control circuit 200 analyzes an image (camera image) taken by the CCD camera 1000 and performs control according to the analysis result.

[Overview of animation request construction process]
The outline of the animation request construction process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an outline of an operation at the time of constructing an animation request (an operation for generating various requests).

  The sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) receives various commands from the main control circuit 70. Further, the sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) receives data of an image (camera video) taken by the CCD camera 1000. Then, based on the received command and data, the sub CPU 201 generates a request referred to as an animation request that includes designation information of effect contents (not shown). Next, the sub CPU 201 generates various requests (effect start request) such as a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and an accessory request based on the generated animation request.

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 outputs each generated request to the control circuit (controller) of the corresponding rendering device. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 outputs a sound request and a lamp request to the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207, outputs a drawing request to the display control circuit 205, and outputs an accessory request to the drive control circuit 208. . Note that the audio control circuit 206 and the LED control circuit 207 may be provided separately or may be configured by a single control circuit.

  The sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207 control the sound reproduction operation by the speaker 11 based on the input sound request. Further, the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207 control the light emission effect (LED animation) operation by the lamp (LED) group 59 based on the input lamp request. The display control circuit 205 controls the image display effect operation by the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the input drawing request. In addition, the drive control circuit 208 controls the rendering operation by the various accessories based on the generated accessory request.

[Speaker drive control method]
Next, when the sound request is output from the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the sound / LED control circuits 206, 207, the sound / LED control circuits 206, 207 perform driving of the speaker 11 The contents of the control process will be described. FIG. 10A is a signal flow diagram at the time of speaker driving (sound reproduction).

  At the time of sound reproduction (output) of the speaker 11, first, a sound request is output from the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) in the sub control circuit 200 to the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207. In the present embodiment, the effect control process (sub-control main process shown in FIG. 26 described later) of the sub CPU 201 is performed at a predetermined FPS cycle, so that a sound request is transmitted to the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207. Processing is also performed at a predetermined FPS cycle.

  Next, when a sound request is input to the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207, the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207 set a sound signal for setting a sound output pattern from the speaker 11 based on the sound request. (Audio data) is transmitted to the built-in relay board.

  Then, the built-in relay board amplifies the received audio signal, outputs it to the speaker 11, and drives the speaker 11. Thereby, the sound reproduction (production) operation by the speaker 11 is executed.

[Lamp (LED) drive control method]
Next, when a lamp request is output from the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) to the sound / LED control circuits 206, 207, the sound / LED control circuits 206, 207 are included in the lamp (LED) group 59. The contents of various drive control processes for the plurality of LEDs will be described. In the lamp control method of the present embodiment described below, an LED is described as an example of the light emitting element, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present embodiment is also applied to other arbitrary light emitting elements. The lamp control method can be similarly applied. FIG. 10B is a signal flow diagram during LED driving (lighting / extinguishing).

  When driving (turning on / off) the LED, first, a lamp request (LED control request) is output from the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) in the sub control circuit 200 to the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207. In the present embodiment, the effect control process (sub-control main process shown in FIG. 26 described later) of the sub CPU 201 is performed at a predetermined FPS cycle, so that a lamp request is transmitted to the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207. Processing is also performed at a predetermined FPS cycle.

  Next, when a lamp request is input to the sound / LED control circuits 206, 207, the sound / LED control circuits 206, 207 are LEDs for setting an LED lighting pattern (LED animation) based on the lamp request. Data (drive data) is transmitted to each LED driver in the LED group 59.

  Then, the LED driver turns on / off the connected LEDs 59 in a predetermined pattern based on the received LED data. As a result, an effect operation based on LED animation is executed. For example, the LED 59 is controlled to blink at a predetermined cycle (for example, at an interval of 12 milliseconds) as an effect operation.

  The light emission mode based on the LED data is controlled by a signal (control signal) generated based on the LED data transmitted from the LED driver to the LED 59. Specifically, depending on the electrical waveform parameters (voltage value, current value, duty ratio of the pulse width, etc.) of the signal transmitted from the LED driver to the LED 59, the light emission mode such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and luminance of the LED 59 is changed. Be controlled.

  Next, the data configuration and the like of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is based on the hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 44, and “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lost”. One of the above is referred to to determine by lottery. The winning random number determination table (second starting port) is determined by lottery based on a random number value for winning determination acquired when a game ball wins the second starting port 45 by lottery. Referenced when doing.

  The random number value for winning determination is a random value for determining a lottery result performed in response to the start opening prize. More specifically, the random number value for hit determination is a value indicating a lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the hit determination random number value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44, any one of “big hit”, “small win”, and “losing” is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the winning random number determination table (at the time of the first start opening winning), “big hit”, “small hit” for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”). And the range (width) of the winning judgment random values for which the winning of each “losing” is determined, and the corresponding judging value data (“big hit judging value data”, “small hit judging value data” and “losing judgment value”) Data ”). The probability change flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the game state is “probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when it is “non-probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “0”.

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for winning determination is any one of “0” to “204”, “big hit” is won. , "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. In other words, the winning probability (hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  In addition, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number value for winning determination is any one of “205” to “409” at the time of winning the first starting port 44, “small winning” is won, The “small hit determination value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  Furthermore, when the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “409”, “Lose” is won and “Lose determination” Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any one of “0” to “1092” at the time of winning the first start opening 44, “Big hit” is won, Determination value data "is determined. In other words, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 1093/65536 (≈ 1/60), which is higher than that in the case where the probability variation flag is “0”.

  When the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is any one of “1093” to “1297”, “small hit” is won and “ The “small hit determination value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319), which is the same as when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  Furthermore, when the first start opening 44 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for hit determination is not any of “0” to “1297”, “losing” is won, and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 44, the big hit probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability changed game state”. Specifically, when the gaming state is the “probability changing gaming state”, the big hit probability when the gaming ball wins the first starting port 44 is about five times higher than when the gaming state is not the “probability changing gaming state”. .

  Similarly, when the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number value for winning determination is any one of “0” to “204” at the time of winning the second starting opening 45, “big hit” is won and “ The “hit determination value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability (hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  In addition, when the second start opening 45 is won, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number value for hit determination is not any of “205” to “409”, “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is “1” and the winning determination random value is any one of “0” to “1092” at the time of winning the second starting opening 45, “big hit” is won and “big hit” Determination value data "is determined. In other words, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 1093/65536 (≈ 1/60), which is higher than that in the case where the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the second start opening 45 is won, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for winning determination is not any of “0” to “1092,” “losing” is won and “losing determination” Value data "is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the second start opening 45, whether or not the game state at the time of winning is “probability game state” without winning “small hit”. Depending on whether or not the jackpot probability fluctuates, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is “probability changing gaming state” is about five times higher than when it is not “probability changing gaming state”.

[Design determination table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 and the above-described determination value data. This is referred to in order to select a “hit selection symbol command” and a “symbol designation command” which determine the stop symbol. The “success selection symbol command” is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the type of winning at the time of winning, and the “symbol designation command” designates a symbol that is displayed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a command to do. The design random number value is extracted from 0 to 99 (100 types), for example.

  According to the symbol determination table (first start port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “49”, 50/100 “Z0” is selected as the winning selection symbol command with the probability of “zA1” as the symbol designation command. When the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “50” to “99”, “z1” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. “ZA1” is selected as the symbol designating command. In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “99”, “z2” is selected as the symbol selecting symbol command at the time of hitting, “ZA2” is selected. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any of “0” to “99”, the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA3” is selected as the symbol designation command. Selected.

  Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “49”, 50 “Z3” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of / 100, and “zA4” is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “50” to “99”, “z4” is selected as the symbol selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. “ZA5” is selected as the symbol designating command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “99”, the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and “zA6” is selected as the symbol designation command. Selected.

[Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The jackpot type determination table is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds and the V-winning ease, in accordance with the symbol selection command for the jackpot. In the present embodiment, if the big hit is won regardless of the type of the big hit, the hour / hour flag is set to “1”, and the hour / hour number is set to 100, for example. Further, only when the V win is won in the big hit gaming state, the probability variation number is set as 124 times, for example. The short time flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73 and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “short time gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “1”, and when it is “non-time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “0”. The number of times shortened is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol game in which the time-short gaming state can be continued. The number of times of probability change is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol game in which the probability variation gaming state can be continued. In other words, if the special symbol change is made for the number of times (100 times) without winning a big win in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is ended and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. If a special symbol change corresponding to the number of times of probability variation is made without winning a big win in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the winning selection symbol command is “z0”, the jackpot that is difficult to win with the number of rounds “10” is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is “z1”, a big hit that allows easy V winning with the number of rounds being “10” is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is “z3”, the winning number is determined as “4” and the V winning is easy. When the winning selection symbol command is “z4”, a big hit that allows easy V winning with a round number of “16” is determined.

  Below, the various processes performed with the pachinko machine 1 are shown.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 14 shows a power-on process by the main CPU 71. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). The power interruption detection signal is turned ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, for example. When the power interruption detection signal is ON, the main CPU 71 determines that the power interruption detection state is present, and repeats the process of step S12 until the power interruption detection signal is turned OFF. When the power interruption detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 determines that the power interruption is detected, and the process proceeds to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 71 permits access to the RWM (main RAM).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process that waits until the sub control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S15).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing to clear the backup contents of the main RAM 73 provided in the main CPU 71 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / launch control circuit 300. . When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection flag is set on. The power interruption detection flag is a flag indicating that power interruption processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of power interruption. When the power interruption detection flag is set on, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S18. When the power interruption detection flag is set off, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S23.

  In step S <b> 18, the main CPU 71 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 73 using, for example, a checksum.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). When the work area is normal, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S23.

  In step S <b> 20, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs notification setting for the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state) at the time of restoration of power interruption (step S21).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs processing for transmitting a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S22). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

  In step S <b> 23, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the work area of the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM) (step S24).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs processing for transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S25). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 15 shows system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 71. The system timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, for example. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 73 (step S31).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs random number update processing for updating various random number values (step S32).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S34).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S35).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs game information output processing for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information relating to a game processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer. .

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the saved register values (step S37). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 16 shows switch input detection processing by the main CPU 71. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S41). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a general winning opening detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts at the time of winning a prize to the general winning openings 51 and 52 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening passing detection process (step S43). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired in accordance with the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the switch input detection process.

[Start-up winning detection processing]
FIG. 17 shows the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 71. The start opening prize detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start-port winning ball sensor 44a (step S51). When the first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a detects a game ball, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S52. If the first start port winning ball sensor 44a does not detect a game ball, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S59.

  In step S52, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting payout information corresponding to the first start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of retained first start winning prizes (the number of retained first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved items is 4, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S59.

  In step S <b> 54, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 71 acquires a random number value for winning determination and a design random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 73 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the winning random number determination table (first start port), the symbol determination table (first start port), and the big hit type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. Then, a symbol designating command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined based on the symbol designation command, determination value data, gaming state, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts processing for setting a command for increasing the number of retained first start opening prizes (step S58). The command for increasing the number of reserved first winning prizes is a command indicating that the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol is incremented by one, such as a command (variable pattern designating command) indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S57. At the same time, it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 45a (step S59). When a game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

  In step S60, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting payout information corresponding to the second start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserved second winning slots (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S62. When the number of reserved is 4, the main CPU 71 ends the start opening winning detection process.

  In step S62, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved second start opening prizes.

  Next, the main CPU 71 obtains a hit determination random number value and a design random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 73 (step S63).

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts second special stop symbol determination processing (step S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value, and the hit random number determination table (second start port) and the symbol determination table (second With reference to the big hit type determination table, the symbol designating command, the winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol based on the symbol designation command, determination value data, gaming state, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a second start opening prize holding number increase command (step S66). The second starting slot winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S65. At the same time, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 18 shows main control main processing by the main CPU 71. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process (step S81). In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing such as the power-on processing described above.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a symbol display device control process (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 71 drives the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in steps S83 and S84. The control signal for performing the process is stored in the main RAM 73. As a result, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62, and the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 transmit the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal. Is displayed in a variable and stopped display.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates a game state command relating to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts storage / game state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 19 shows a special symbol control process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical value ("00" to "08") described in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicates the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 71 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. Based on the value of the read control state flag, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S92 to S100 described later. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of steps S92 to S100. Further, the main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process in steps S92 to S100. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S92). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of reserved special symbols for variable display, and the number of reserved is not “0”. When there is a holding ball, the winning determination result obtained by the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S93) described later, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the special symbol fluctuation time to the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is executed after the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 71 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. The special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol variation time management process (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a value ("01") indicating that the control state flag indicates the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a special symbol display described later is displayed on the control state flag. A value ("02") indicating the time management process (step S94) is set, and a waiting time after determination (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that a special symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is executed after the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S93 has elapsed. This special symbol variation time management process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the hit determination is made when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”) and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed. It is determined whether the result is “big hit” or “small hit”. If the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later in the control state flag. The time corresponding to the big hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after a time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “big hit” or “small win”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S95). In this process, when the control state flag is a value indicating the jackpot start interval management process ("03") and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, Based on the data read from the main ROM 72, the variables positioned in the main RAM 73 are updated in order to open the first grand prize port 53 or the second big prize port 54. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a large winning opening opening process (step S96), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and also sets an opening upper limit time (for example, 30) for the large winning opening. Seconds) is set in the grand prize opening time timer. In other words, this process is set so that a process for opening a special prize opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S96). In this process, first, the main CPU 71 sets the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is a predetermined number or more when the control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the big prize opening opening process, and the release. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has passed (the big winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“05”) indicating a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and sets the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the big prize opening set in step S96 has elapsed, it is set to execute the process for monitoring the residual balls in the big prize mouth described later. Note that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening opening process.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening (the final round) is satisfied. If it is determined that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value indicating the jackpot end interval process ("07") in the control state flag, and a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (the jackpot end interval) Time) in the wait timer. That is, after a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 71 performs waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the main winning opening is opened. The number of times counter is updated so as to increase it by “1”. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the process for opening the special winning opening to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the big prize opening time timer. That is, the process is set so that the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96) is executed again in this process. It should be noted that a display command indicating that the big prize opening is being opened is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the completion of the waiting time management process before the big prize opening reopening.

  When the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit end interval process (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a value ("07") indicating that the control state flag indicates the jackpot end interval process, and a value indicating the special symbol game end process ("" when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed). 08 ") is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S99. At this time, if the V winning in the big hit is successful, the main CPU 71 performs control to shift the gaming state to the probability changing gaming state, and if the V winning in the big hit fails, the main CPU 71 Control to shift to the probable gaming state. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to “small hit”, the main CPU 71 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended, or when “losing” is won (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“08”), the main CPU 71 stores and updates the data indicating the number of holdings (starting storage information) to be decreased by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next special symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the special symbol storage check process (step S92) described above is set to be executed. When this special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol control process.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flags to “00”, “01”, “ 02 ”and“ 08 ”in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol change time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). Are executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag to “00”, “01” when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is “big hit” or “small hit”. , “02”, “03” in this order. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variation time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06”. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97), and the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process (step S98) in this order. A big hit game or a small hit game is executed at a predetermined timing.

  If the end condition for the big hit gaming state is satisfied during the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, “08”. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97), the big hit end interval process (step S99), and the special symbol game end process (step S100). Are executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state is terminated.

  As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 25 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 18 also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module is possible with a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in this embodiment as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 20 shows a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73 by load processing (step S101).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S102). When determining that the control state flag is not “00”, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S103.

  In step S103, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start memorized number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of second start opening winnings is not “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S104. If the main CPU 71 determines that the second start opening winning number is 0, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S109.

  In step S <b> 104, the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start memory number corresponding to the reserved number of second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. Note that the start storage information in each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a winning determination random number value, a symbol random number value acquired at the time of winning the second start port 45, a determined variation pattern, and the like. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S106.

  In step S <b> 106, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit / small hit determination process (step S107). In this process, the main CPU 71 obtains the jackpot determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the start opening and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on the winning random number determination table (see FIG. 11) corresponding to the type of the winning start port, the determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 71 determines (hit determination) which of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lose” is won based on the acquired determination value data.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S108). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S109, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start memorized number) of the first start opening prize (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S110. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S112.

  In step S <b> 110, the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start memory number corresponding to the reserved number of first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, and It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being changed or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing first special symbol is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. Note that the start storage information in each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for winning determination and a design random number value acquired when winning the first start port 44, a determined variation pattern, and the like. It is.

  Next, a special symbol memory transfer process is performed based on the first start opening prize (step S111). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S106.

  In step S112, the main CPU 71 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 has stopped, and when determining that the predetermined time has elapsed, the sub-control circuit 200. Send a demo display command to.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol change in the special symbol display device 61 is stopped, the demonstration screen is displayed when no prizes are generated in the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 for a predetermined time. Is displayed.

  Specifically, the main CPU 71 turns on the demo transition timer when the waiting time timer (the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol) set in step S108 becomes 0 (see step S122 in FIG. 21). Set to. That is, the main CPU 71 starts measuring the time that has elapsed since the special symbol fluctuation stopped. In step S112, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the demo transition timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 3 minutes), and the value of the demo transition timer is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. When it is determined that there is a demo display command, the sub control circuit 200 is transmitted. When receiving the demonstration display command, the sub-control circuit 200 performs processing relating to the display of the demonstration screen.

  Note that if a winning to the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 occurs before the value of the demo transition timer reaches a predetermined value, the main CPU 71 turns off the demo transition timer. Specifically, when the main CPU 71 determines in step S51 of FIG. 17 that the first start-port winning ball sensor 44a has detected a game ball, the main CPU 71 turns off the demo transition timer. If the main CPU 71 determines in step S59 in FIG. 17 that the second starting-port winning ball sensor 45a has detected a game ball, the main CPU 71 turns off the demo transition timer. Thereby, the main CPU 71 ends the measurement of the time that has elapsed since the change of the special symbol stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the above process is executed, so that the predetermined time has passed without the winning to the start port (the first start port 44 and the second start port 45) occurring after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In this case, you will be transferred to the demo screen. When the process of step S112 is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
The special symbol variation time management process performed in step S93 in FIG. 19 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in step S121, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("01") indicating special symbol variation time management. If the main CPU 71 determines that the value indicates the special symbol variation time management (“01”), it moves the process to step S122. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that the value is not the value indicating the special symbol variation time management (“01”), the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In step S122, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S123. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In step S123, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag, and moves the process to step S124.

  In step S124, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to a step S125.

  In step S <b> 125, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 22 shows a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When determining that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time after change confirmation (variation start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is “big hit”. When determining that the special symbol game is “big hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S142. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S134.

  In step S134, the main CPU 71 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is “small hit”. When determining that the special symbol game is “small hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “small hit”, that is, when the special symbol game is “missed”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S135.

  In step S <b> 135, the main CPU 71 performs time-shortening / probability variation subtraction processing. This time / probability variation subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S136). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S137, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S138.

  In step S138, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73 (step S140). As a result, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 13), and sets the round number upper limit value (large winning opening release upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) in the main RAM 73. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S142, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S143.

  In step S143, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the time-short state change frequency counter, the time-short flag and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S138.

[Time reduction and subtraction processing for accuracy variation]
FIG. 23 shows time-shortening / accurate variation number subtraction processing by the main CPU 71. The time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the short-time state variation number counter is 0 (step S151). The short-time state variation number counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set short-time number (in this embodiment, 100 times as an example) becomes zero. When the value of the short time state change frequency counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S155. When the value of the short time state variation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S152.

  In step S152, the main CPU 71 carries out a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the short-time state variation number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines again whether or not the value of the short-time state variation number counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the short time state change frequency counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S154. When the value of the short time state change frequency counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S155.

  In step S154, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the time reduction flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S155.

  In step S155, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is zero. The probability variation state change count counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set probability variation count (in this embodiment, 124 times as an example) becomes zero. When the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time reduction / accuracy variation number subtraction process. When the value of the probability variation state variation counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S156.

  In step S156, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation state variation counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is 0 (step S157). When the value of the probability variation state variation counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S158. If the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time reduction / accuracy variation number subtraction process.

  In step S158, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the probability variation flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the time-shortening / probability variation subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 24 shows the jackpot end interval process by the main CPU 71. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating a big hit end interval process (step S161). When it is determined that the control status flag is not a value indicating the big hit end interval process (“07”) (S161: NO), the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval process (“07”), the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 71 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of the big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

  Next, the main CPU 71 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is cyclically set a predetermined number of times even during one round. This is a flag for indicating whether or not to open and close. When the first grand prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a special symbol end display command to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a “hit” (step S166). When determining that the special symbol game is a “hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S174.

  In step S167, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the value of the big hit flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning is successful during the big hit (step S168). When the V winning is successful, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S169. When the V winning is unsuccessful, the main CPU 71 shifts to a process of step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability variation flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a specified probability variation count (124 times as an example in the present embodiment) in a probability variation state variation count counter (step S170).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” as the time reduction flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a specified time reduction number (100 times as an example in the present embodiment) in the time reduction state change number counter (step S172). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process.

  In step S174, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the value of the small hit flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes the above-described subtraction / probability number subtraction process (step S175). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 25 shows normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 71. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Note that numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 25 indicate a normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 73. Stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 71 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the main CPU 71 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. Based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in steps S192 to S196 described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S192 to S196. The main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process in steps S192 to S196. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of holdings of the normal symbol variable display, and the number of holdings is “0”. If not, a process such as a hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“01”) indicating a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193), which will be described later, in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in the current processing. Set to the wait timer. That is, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is executed after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed by the process of step S192.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs normal symbol variation time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 71 indicates that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, and when the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag is described later. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a waiting time after determination (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed after the set post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed by the process of step S193.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after the determination set in the process of step S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the determination result is “winning”. When the result of the hit determination is “hit”, the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory release setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates a value (step S195) indicating a normal electric accessory release process (step S195) described later. “03”) is set. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary electric accessory release process is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not “win”, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game end process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 71 determines in step S194 that the result of the hit determination is “win”, the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory release process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process, the main CPU 71 has received a predetermined number of winnings during the opening of the normal electric accessory 46. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 has elapsed (the ordinary electric role opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When the above one condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to put the blade-like member, which is the ordinary electric accessory 46, in a closed state. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described normal symbol game end process (step S196) in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 71 decreases the data indicating the number of holdings of the variable symbol variable display by “1”. Update the memory. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next normal symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub-control circuit 200 executes the sub-control circuit main process. The sub control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, and backup restoration initialization (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for clearing the counter value of the watch dog timer (step S202). When the watchdog timer is activated, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (timeout), the power interruption process is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S203). The operation means input process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S205). In this process (animation request construction process), the sub CPU 201 generates an animation request including designation information of effect contents, and various requests (drawing request, sound request) for operating various effect devices based on the animation request. , Ramp request, and accessory request). The effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a drawing control process (step S206). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 205. The display control circuit 205 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 13 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes voice control processing (step S207). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a sound request to the sound control circuit 206. The sound control circuit 206 performs sound control for causing the speaker 11 to output sound based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes LED control processing (step S208). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a lamp request to the LED control circuit 207. The LED control circuit 207 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h based on a message (lamp request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an accessory control process (step S209). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits an accessory request to the drive control circuit 208. The drive control circuit 208 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor 60 related to the movable accessory based on the message (the accessory request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process in step S201 is completed, each process from step S202 to step S209 is repeatedly executed.

[Button input interrupt processing]
FIG. 27 shows button input interrupt processing by the sub CPU 201. The button input interrupt process is executed in parallel with the sub-control circuit main process, for example, every 1 ms by updating the measurement timer. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230 (step S221). If there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of step S222. If there is no input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

  In step S222, the sub CPU 201 determines the operation state of the effect button 23 based on the input signal from the effect button switch 230, and generates information indicating the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

[Operating means input processing]
FIG. 28 shows operation means input processing by the sub CPU 201. The operation means input process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 acquires the operation state based on the information indicating the operation state (step S231). The operation state includes the number of times of pressing for the effect button 23, and includes the rotation direction and angle, and the rotation speed for the jog dial 24. The effect is determined according to the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the operation means input process.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the command analysis process performed in step S204 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure of command analysis processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 acquires a received command stored in the work RAM 203 and performs a process of analyzing the acquired received command (step S241). At this time, if there is error information associated with the received command, the sub CPU 201 discards the received command.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 specifies the type of the command in the analysis of the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores information on the specified command type in the work RAM 203. The command type is specified based on information (a preset value) stored in the command type part (first byte area) of each command.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no command type corresponding to the command received in the command type specifying process, the sub CPU 201 discards the received command. Also, the sub CPU 201 confirms the number of parameters included in the received command, and discards the received command if the number of parameters is different from the number of parameters corresponding to the specified command type.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing (command parameter check processing) for checking the consistency of the received command (step S242). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 checks the contents of information (hereinafter referred to as command parameters) in various parameters set for each command. Specifically, the sub CPU 201, for example, always checks the zero area provided in a predetermined bit area in the parameter, checks the effective range of each data stored in the parameter, and the combination of stored data. Check.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not the command parameter included in the received command is normal in checking the consistency of the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the command parameter is normal (whether or not the command is valid). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the command parameter included in the received command is not normal, the sub CPU 201 discards the data of the received command.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the command parameter included in the received command is normal, the sub CPU 201 reflects (registers) the command parameter (information such as game status) in the game data. Further, the sub CPU 201 stores the game data reflecting the command parameters in a predetermined area in the work RAM 203. The “game data” includes parameter information in the command and the like, and is a data structure (a storage area or a collection of variables) referred to in various lottery processes or animation request construction processes performed by the sub CPU 201. ). In the “game data”, as will be described later, information on lottery results of various lottery processes (eg, production patterns) is also registered.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, the sub CPU 201 acquires various random numbers for effects, and performs a lottery process related to determination of effect contents corresponding to the command type of the received command.

  For example, when the received command is a special symbol effect start command, the sub CPU 201 determines various effect patterns such as a decorative symbol variation pattern (sub variation pattern) and an image effect pattern for displaying a background image. For example, when the received command is a pending number increase command, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect pattern related to the prefetch effect.

  Also, in the process of step S243, the sub CPU 201 stores the lottery result of the sub lottery process (for example, information on the various effect patterns described above) in a predetermined area in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a demo migration control process (step S244). In this process, when the received command is a demo display command (see step S112 in FIG. 20), the sub CPU 201 generates a drawing request (request for displaying the demo screen on the liquid crystal display device 13).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect pattern selection process (step S245). In this process, the sub CPU 201 selects a lottery result (effect pattern) obtained by the sub lottery process in step S243. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 reflects (registers) the effect pattern obtained by the sub lottery process in step S243 (for example, the effect pattern related to the sub variation pattern or the prefetch effect) in the game data stored in the work RAM 203. Let After the process of step S245, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process, and moves the process to step S205 of the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 26).

[Production mode determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the effect mode determination process performed in step S205 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 26) will be described. In addition, FIG. 30 is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation aspect determination process in this embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 executes camera image analysis processing (step S261). The camera image analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a video-related selection process (step S262). In this process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the game data information stored in the work RAM 203, generates an animation request, and sets the animation request in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. This process generates an animation request according to the command reception and camera video analysis results. Next, the sub CPU 201 generates a drawing request (a control signal for controlling the liquid crystal display device 13) based on the animation request.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a lamp pattern (lamp request) selection process (step S263). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a lamp request (a control signal for controlling the LED 59).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sound pattern (sound request) selection process (step S264). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a sound request (control signal for controlling the speaker 11).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs other (that is, other than video-related, lamp request, and sound request) selection processing (step S265). Note that this process includes, for example, a process for selecting an accessory request for controlling the rendering operation of various actors.

  And after the process of step S265, sub CPU201 complete | finishes an effect mode determination process, and moves a process to step S206 of a sub control circuit main process (refer FIG. 26).

[Camera image analysis processing]
The camera image analysis process performed in step S261 in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing camera image analysis processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 201 receives image data obtained by photographing from the CCD camera 1000 (step S281). In the present embodiment, an image (camera video) captured by the CCD camera 1000 is a moving image composed of a plurality of still images (frame images). In other words, the camera video has a content constituted by a number of still images (frame images) continuous over time. The frame rate of the CCD camera 1000 is not particularly limited. For example, a CCD camera of 250 fps (frames per second) can be employed. In the processing of step S281, the sub CPU 201 requests the control LSI included in the CCD camera 1000 to transmit data corresponding to the frame image (frame image data). In the CCD camera 1000, when there is frame image data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, it is possible to store frame image data for one frame in a buffer. When the frame image data is stored in the buffer, the control LSI of the CCD camera 1000 transmits the frame image data to the sub control circuit 200. In this manner, an image photographed by the CCD camera 1000 is input to the sub control circuit 200 in units of frames. When the frame image data is received, the sub CPU 201 stores the received frame image data in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs projective transformation on the received frame image data. FIG. 32A (a) is a diagram showing an image before performing projective transformation. FIG. 32A (b) is a diagram illustrating an image after performing the projective transformation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the CCD camera 1000 is located above the game board 12 to be photographed (see FIG. 6), and photographs the game board 12 from above. As a result, the image taken by the CCD camera 1000 is distorted, and the image appears to extend downward (see FIG. 32A (a)). By performing projective transformation based on the four-point marker for such an image, the distortion can be corrected (see FIG. 32A (b)).

  Further, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of enhancing the contrast by converting the value (pixel value) indicating the lightness and darkness in each pixel (lightness and darkness conversion for each pixel) with respect to the frame image data (step S282). In this process, the sub CPU 201 converts each pixel value based on a predetermined function indicating a correspondence relationship between each pixel value before density conversion (density conversion) for each pixel and each pixel value after density conversion. Such density conversion can be performed, for example, by a method such as histogram expansion or histogram flattening. Thereby, it is possible to add sharpness to the shade of the frame image.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 performs filtering on the frame image data by gradation conversion including the surrounding pixels of each pixel (contrast conversion based on the region) (step S283). In this process, the sub CPU 201 converts each pixel value by using a predetermined spatial filter. For example, a smoothing filter can be used as the spatial filter, and an averaging filter (moving average filter) or a weighted average filter can be used as the smoothing filter. In the present embodiment, for example, it is desirable to use a Gaussian filter (Gaussian filter) as the weighted averaging filter. In the Gaussian filter, the pixels in the area covered by the filter are weighted based on a function indicating a Gaussian distribution.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram illustrating an example of the moving average filter. FIG. 32B (a) shows a 3 × 3 pixel filter, and FIG. 32B (b) shows a 5 × 5 pixel filter. In the moving average filter, the pixel values in the area covered by the filter are all the same value (average value of the pixel values in the area). FIG. 32C is a diagram illustrating an example of a weighted averaging filter. FIG. 32C (a) shows a 3 × 3 pixel filter, and FIG. 32C (b) shows a 5 × 5 pixel filter. In such a weighted average filter (Gaussian filter), as compared with the moving average filter, the degree of weighting becomes larger as the pixel is closer to the origin of the filter (the target pixel). Natural smoothing can be performed. In the spatial filtering as described above, the value of one pixel in the image after filtering (output image) is not only the value of the pixel corresponding to the one pixel in the image before filtering (input image), As shown in FIGS. 32B and 32C, the calculation is performed based on the values of pixels within a certain range including pixels around the pixel. In addition, the moving average filter and the weighted averaging filter may execute processing for each pixel by applying one parameter (for example, a coefficient) in which one value is set to the frame image data. In particular, in the weighted averaging filter, one value can be obtained by applying the distance from the vertex portion of the frame image data (for example, the central portion of the frame image data) to the Gaussian function. Therefore, if the value passed to the Gaussian function is changed, the value set for each pixel can be easily changed. In addition, in the Gaussian function, even when the calculation is performed not only in two dimensions but also in three dimensions, the parameter can be obtained depending on the distance from the vertex portion. By changing the argument, it becomes possible to perform processing for each pixel, and the versatility of the processing can be improved. In addition, it is not limited to the example of applying one parameter in which one value is stored, one parameter (for example, coefficient, array, structure, etc.) in which a plurality of values are stored, and a plurality of values are stored A plurality of parameters (for example, coefficients, arrays, structures, etc.), a plurality of parameters (for example, coefficients, arrays, structures, etc.) in which one value is stored can be set in various ways. As a result, it is possible to reduce variations in light and shade caused by noise included in the frame image.

  In this embodiment, by using the above-described techniques such as projective transformation, contrast enhancement, spatial filtering, and other image processing techniques, it is possible to improve the image quality by processing the frame image data. Is possible. The frame image data obtained as described above is stored in the work RAM 203 and used for subsequent processing. The processing in step S282 and step S283 is positioned as preprocessing for facilitating extraction of the position of the game ball in the frame image in the subsequent processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of extracting a difference between the previous and next frames (step S284). Hereinafter, the difference extraction between the front and rear frames will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Extraction of difference between previous and next frames>
FIG. 33 is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between previous and next frames. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a state where the game ball rolls in the game area. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a process of obtaining the difference image (1) from the frame image photographed at time T1 and the frame image photographed at time T2. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a process of obtaining the difference image (2) from the frame image captured at time T2 and the frame image captured at time T3. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a process of extracting a game ball at time T2 from the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a masking region.

  In FIG. 34, in a state where a plurality of game balls roll in the game area 12a, attention is paid to one game ball, the position of the game ball at time T1 is shown as the game ball 120a, and the game at time T2 is shown. The position of the ball is shown as a game ball 120b, and the position of the game ball at time T3 is shown as a game ball 120c. In addition, LED59 (effect LED) is provided in the vicinity of the game ball 120a, the game ball 120b, and the game ball 120c.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the effect LED is turned off at time T1, the effect LED is lit between time T1 and time T2, and then the state where the effect LED is lit continues until time T4. Assume that

  35 to 37, paying attention to the vicinity of the area where one game ball (the game ball shown in FIG. 34) moves from time T1 to time T3 in the entire range photographed by the CCD camera 1000. Show. In these figures, only a part of the shooting range is shown for easy understanding, but actually, the following processing is collectively performed for the entire shooting range. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted except a game ball and effect LED.

  In the difference extraction between the previous and next frames, first, as shown in FIG. 35, for the frame image taken at time T1 (first frame image) and the frame image taken at time T2 (second frame image). By executing the difference processing, an image corresponding to the difference between the first frame image and the second frame image is created. The image shows the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values in the first frame image and the second frame image. The image obtained in this way is referred to as a difference image (1). Note that a binary image obtained by performing threshold processing after performing differential processing may be used as the differential image (1). By binarization, the pixel value above the threshold is converted to 1 (white pixel), and the pixel value below the threshold is converted to 0 (black pixel) (or vice versa). It is possible to extract a region having a particularly large change between the image of the second frame. The difference image (1) includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120a) at time T1, the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2, and the LED 59 (effect LED).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 36, difference processing is performed on the frame image (second frame image) captured at time T2 and the frame image (third frame image) captured at time T3. Thus, an image corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the third frame image is created. The image shows the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values in the second frame image and the third frame image. Let the image obtained in this way be a difference image (2). A binary image obtained by performing threshold processing after performing differential processing may be used as the differential image (2). By binarization, the pixel value above the threshold is converted to 1 (white pixel) and the pixel value below the threshold is converted to 0 (black pixel) (or vice versa). It is possible to extract a region having a particularly large change with respect to the third frame image. The difference image (2) includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2 and the game ball (game ball 120c) at time T3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37, a process (AND process) of calculating a logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is performed. Thereby, the common part of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is extracted, and the image obtained in this way (the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2)) is obtained at time T2. The position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) is indicated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the position of the game ball at time T2 can be detected while eliminating the effects of turning on and off the effect LED. Similarly, an image corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the third frame image (difference image (2)) and an image corresponding to the difference between the third frame image and the fourth frame image (difference) By taking a logical product with the image (3)), the position of the game ball at the time T3 can be detected (see FIG. 33).

  Since the effect LED is lit continuously from time T2 to time T3, the difference image (2) does not include the position information of the LED 59 (effect LED) (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the position of the game ball at time T3 is also detected by taking the difference between the difference image (2) and the AND image (see FIG. 37) of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). Can do. In this way, the position of the game ball can be detected more quickly, and various controls such as effects can be executed in real time according to the rolling (position change) of the game ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the frame rate of the CCD camera 1000 is 250 fps. That is, the frame image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000 is 4 milliseconds per frame. On the other hand, the LED 59 (production LED) is controlled to blink at a cycle interval of 12 milliseconds (12 milliseconds on and 12 milliseconds off are repeated), and the image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000 is It is 1/3 of the blinking cycle interval of the LED. In the present embodiment, it is desirable that the image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000 be set to 1/2 or less (or 1/3 or less, 1/4 or less, etc.) of the blinking cycle interval of the effect LED. Alternatively, the length of the shortest section of the lighting section or the extinguishing section when the state of the effect LED is switched from “off → lighting → off” or “lighting → off → lighting” is 2 of the image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000. It is desirable to control the effect LED so that it becomes twice or more (or three times or more, four times or more, etc.).

Thereby, even if the state of the effect LED is switched from “off → lighting → off” or “lighting → off → lighting”, three consecutive frame images (first frame image, second frame image) Any of the following (i) to (vi) can be acquired as the image of the third frame). “Light-off state” and “light-on state” indicate the state of the effect LED included in each frame image. In any of the following (i) to (vi), the position of the game ball can be detected by the method described above while eliminating the influence of turning on and off the effect LED.
(I) First frame image: off state, second frame image: off state, third frame image: on state (ii) first frame image: off state, second frame image: on state, Third frame image: lighting state (iii) First frame image: lighting state, second frame image: off state, third frame image: off state (iv) First frame image: lighting state, 2 Frame image: ON state, third frame image: OFF state (v) First frame image: OFF state, second frame image: OFF state, third frame image: OFF state (vi) 1 frame Eye image: lighting state, second frame image: lighting state, third frame image: lighting state

  In the example of FIGS. 34 to 37, the case where the LED 59 (effect LED) is provided in the vicinity of the game ball has been described, but the same applies to the case where an object other than the effect LED is provided. Explanation is valid. The other object includes not only a stationary object but also an operable object (movable member). As such a movable member, there are a state (open state) that allows a game ball to enter the winning opening (starting port) and a state (closed state) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. Examples include various movable members disposed at predetermined positions on the game board, such as a switchable (open / close operation) role and other movable movable items. Specifically, an electric tulip-shaped accessory that rotates in the left-right direction of the game board, an accessory that operates a wing-shaped member, and an accessory that includes a tongue-like member that moves horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board, Examples thereof include a rotating member that can rotate around a direction perpendicular to the game board or a vertical direction as a rotation axis. Since such a movable member changes its appearance over time by performing an operation (without changing the position) with a predetermined position on the game board as a reference, the change in the appearance also appears in the frame image. become. However, the movable member can be removed from the image by the method described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, and the position of the game ball can be detected while eliminating the influence of such an appearance change.

  In addition, areas where structures (for example, launch passages, windmills, etc.) that cause erroneous detection of game ball position information are arranged, or areas where game balls need not be tracked (game balls cannot pass through). The area may be excluded from the image processing target by performing masking in advance (see FIG. 38). Thereby, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and to reduce the burden on image processing. In FIG. 38, the blacked area is the masking area. In FIG. 38, masking is applied to the guide path 41c (area through which the game ball passes from the ball discharge port 41d to be released into the game area 12a) and the windmill 125 (see FIG. 34), which are launch paths. It shows a state. Note that FIG. 38 shows a state in which masking is not performed on a part of the windmill 125 (a small portion at the top and bottom), but the entire windmill 125 may be included in the masking region.

  The preceding and following frame difference extraction processing performed in step S284 of FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S284, the sub CPU 201 confirms the injection position (injection area) and the discharge position (discharge area) (step S285). Hereinafter, the injection region and the discharge region will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

<Injection area and discharge area>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an injection region and a discharge region. FIG. 40 is a conceptual diagram for explaining assignment of IDs to game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the injection area and the discharge area are areas set as fixed ranges in the game area 12a. In the drawing, the injection region and the discharge region are shown as regions surrounded by a square. The injection area is an area through which the game ball first passes when the game ball is discharged from the ball discharge port 41d (see FIG. 5) to the game area 12a. The discharge area is an area through which the game ball rolling in the game area 12a passes when it is discharged to the outside of the game area 12a. Specifically, the injection region is a region within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the ball return prevention piece 42 (see FIG. 5). As the discharge areas, five areas of discharge areas 1 to 5 are set. The discharge region 1 is a region within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the first start port 44, the discharge region 2 is a region within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the second start port 45, and the discharge region 3 is a first large region. The area within the predetermined range in the vicinity of the winning opening 53, the discharge area 4 is an area within the predetermined range in the vicinity of the second big winning opening 54, and the discharge area 5 is in the predetermined range near the out mouth 55. It is an area.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls can roll on the game area 12a at the same time, and identification information (ID) is assigned to each of the plurality of game balls. Each game ball ID is associated with position information of the game ball, and where each of the plurality of game balls exists in the game area 12a is individually managed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the ID is an image in which different numbers, marks, and colors are assigned to the respective game balls. The ID is assigned immediately after the game ball is released from the ball discharge port 41d to the game area 12a (when passing through the injection area). Specifically, in step S285 of FIG. 31, the sub CPU 201 performs the following processing.

  In the above-described difference between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31), the position of each game ball rolling in the game area 12a is detected. If there is a game ball belonging to the emission area among the plurality of game balls whose positions are specified in this way (a plurality of game balls rolling in the game area 12a), a new ID is newly assigned to the game ball. assign. FIG. 40 shows a state in which one game ball is completely contained in the ejection area. However, if at least a part of one game ball is included in the ejection area, an ID is assigned to the game ball. It will be assigned. Even if one game ball belongs to the injection area, if an ID is already assigned to the game ball, it is not necessary to assign an ID again, but in that case, an ID is assigned again. It is good as well. The sub CPU 201 stores the position information of the game ball to which the new ID is assigned in association with the new ID in the work RAM 203.

  An ID may be assigned to all game balls that have passed through the emission area, but an upper limit is set for the number of IDs that can be assigned, and the number of already assigned IDs has reached the upper limit. In the case of being present, priority may be given to the tracking of the game ball already assigned an ID (see FIG. 42), and no ID may be assigned to the game ball that has passed through the emission area. On the other hand, giving priority to the assignment of a new ID, after finishing the tracking of a game ball that has already been assigned an ID (for example, the game ball having the longest elapsed time since passing through the injection area) and releasing the ID, The ID may be assigned to a game ball that has newly passed through the injection area.

  Also, in order to prevent the number of game balls to be tracked from increasing excessively, a new game area is newly created by temporarily suspending the assignment of an ID to a game ball that has passed through the emission area according to the game state. It is also possible to remove the game ball that is launched from the tracking target. Alternatively, an area with a large tracking processing burden may be excluded from the tracking target area as a masking area, and it may be simply determined whether or not a game ball exists in a game area other than the masking area. Furthermore, when the number of IDs already assigned is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (when the total number of game balls existing in the game area 12a is greater than or equal to a certain value), N (for example, two) game balls pass through the ejection area. Each time an ID is assigned only to the game ball so that only the game ball that first passes through the ejection area among the N game balls is to be tracked. For example, in the big hit game state, the game ball is more easily held in the game area 12a for a longer time than in the normal game state. There is also an attacker having a structure that slows down the rolling speed of the game ball. In such a case, if all the game balls existing in the game area 12a are tracked, the processing load increases. In this regard, if the configuration as described above is adopted, even if more game balls are accumulated in the game area 12a than usual, it is possible to suppress the processing burden for tracking the game balls to a certain limit. . On the other hand, even in such a case, it is possible to take measures against fraud (see FIG. 46) by tracking a part of the game balls.

  On the other hand, any of the discharge areas 1 to 5 among the plurality of game balls (the plurality of game balls rolling on the game area 12a) whose positions are specified by the difference extraction process between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31). Check if there is a game ball belonging to. Not only when one game ball is completely within the discharge area, but also when at least a part of one game ball is included in the discharge area, it is determined that the game ball belongs to the discharge area. When there is a game ball belonging to any of the discharge areas 1 to 5, the sub CPU 201 associates the ID of the game ball with information (a flag immediately before discharge) indicating that the game ball belongs to the discharge area. It is stored in the work RAM 203.

  Such an injection area and a discharge area can be arbitrarily set. For example, it is possible to set one area selected from a plurality of predetermined areas as an injection area and a discharge area on the hall menu and various setting screens of the gaming machine. Moreover, you may comprise so that the arbitrary area | regions in a game board can be set as an injection | emission area | region or a discharge | emission area | region using a touch panel etc. Of course, it may be automatically set according to the model. The discharge area may be set in the vicinity of the general winning opening in addition to the vicinity of the starting opening and the big winning opening. When the discharge area is set in the vicinity of the winning opening, the discharging area may be set in a wider range as the winning opening is larger. The masking area (see FIG. 38) can also be set in the same manner as the injection area and the discharge area.

  The injection / discharge position confirmation process performed in step S285 of FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S285, the sub CPU 201 executes a game medium tracking process (step S286). Hereinafter, the game medium tracking process will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Game media tracking process>
FIG. 41A shows the position of the game ball at time T2. FIG. 41B shows the position of the game ball at time T3. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a game medium tracking process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a search range based on the position of the game ball at time T2.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the frame image (first frame image) captured at time T1, the frame image (second frame image) captured at time T2, and the time T3. Based on the captured frame image (third frame image), the position of the game ball at time T2 is specified.

  Although a large number of game balls may exist simultaneously in the game area 12a, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, in FIG. 41 (a), attention is paid to two game balls, and these two game balls at time T2 Indicates the position. The two game balls are assigned IDs ID (1) and ID (2), respectively.

  Also, the frame image (second frame image) captured at time T2, the frame image (third frame image) captured at time T3, and the frame image (fourth frame image) captured at time T4. ), The position of the game ball at time T3 is specified.

  Similar to FIG. 41 (a), FIG. 41 (b) focuses on two game balls and shows the positions of these two game balls at time T3. In the figure, the position of one game ball is shown as a game ball 120d, and the position of the other game ball is shown as a game ball 120e.

  In the example of FIG. 41, the game ball indicated by ID (1) moves to the position indicated as the game ball 120d between time T2 and time T3, and the game ball indicated by ID (2) From time T3 to time T3 is considered to have moved to a position indicated as a game ball 120e. However, in the state where a large number of game balls are rolling in the game area 12a at the same time, the game ball 120d is identified as the game ball indicated by ID (1), and the game ball 120e is indicated by ID (2). Identifying as a game ball (accurately grasping that the game ball 120d is the same as the game ball indicated by ID (1) and that the game ball 120e is the same as the game ball indicated by ID (2) ) Is not easy in practice (the game ball 120e is the same as the game ball indicated by ID (1), and the game ball 120d may be the same as the game ball indicated by ID (2)). Cannot be easily excluded).

  The game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 42 is a process for associating the game ball at time T2 with the game ball at time T3. That is, the game medium tracking process is a process of linking the same game balls with respect to a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T2 and a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T3. For example, this is a process of tracking to which position a game ball that existed at a certain position at time T2 has moved from time T2 to time T3.

  As a premise, it is assumed that the position of the game ball at time T2 and the position of the game ball at time T3 are specified by the above-described difference between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31). An image indicating the position of the game ball at time T2 is referred to as a ball position image (T2), and an image indicating the position of the game ball at time T3 is referred to as a ball position image (T3).

  The sphere position image (T2) is an AND image (see FIG. 37) of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), and the sphere position image (T3) is the difference image (2) and the difference image (3). AND image. The ball position image (T2) includes position information of a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T2, and each position information corresponds to an ID assigned to the game ball existing at the position. In addition, it is stored in the work RAM 203. The ball position image (T3) includes position information of a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T3, and each piece of position information is stored in the work RAM 203. Before the game medium tracking process is performed, the position information of the game sphere included in the ball position image (T3) is not associated with the ID of the game sphere. By performing the game medium tracking process, each position information of the game sphere included in the ball position image (T3) is associated with the ID of the game sphere. This will be specifically described below.

  First, the sub CPU 201 acquires an image of the target frame (step S301). The target frame refers to the sphere position image (T2) and the sphere position image (T3). The sub CPU 201 reads out data indicating the sphere position image (T2) and data indicating the sphere position image (T3) from the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines one ID (for example, ID (1)) of all IDs currently being managed as a processing target, and sets it to the previous frame (ball position image (T2)). A search range based on the position of the game ball associated with the one ID among the plurality of game balls included is set (step S302).

  As described above, the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T2) (the plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T2) are associated with the IDs of the game balls, respectively. A search range is set for each of the plurality of game balls (a plurality of IDs). The search range is a region (time corresponding to one frame) where a game ball that exists at a certain position at time T2 (at a certain time) is likely to exist at time T3 (after a time corresponding to one frame has elapsed). The range in which the game ball can move) is set in advance according to each position in the ball position image.

  For example, for the game ball indicated by ID (1), a search range as shown in FIG. 43 is set in the vicinity region of the position of the game ball of ID (1). The same applies to game balls to which other IDs are assigned, and search ranges are set as many as the number of game balls included in the ball position image (T2). Here, the process from step S302 to step S314 is configured to loop. For example, after the process from step S302 to step S314 is performed for ID (1), the process from step S302 to step S314 is performed for ID (2). This subroutine proceeds in such a manner that processing is performed, and then processing of step S302 to step S314 is performed for ID (3). Instead of looping each step, all IDs may be processed collectively for each step.

  Such a search range may be set in advance based on a value related to the rolling of the game ball calculated by an experiment or the like (for example, a possible rolling speed or an acceleration), or may be included in the analysis result of the camera video. It is good also as setting by performing separately the process which estimates the rolling possible range of a game ball based on it.

  In the process of step S303, the sub CPU 201 sets the position of each of the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) and one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) at the time T2. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) by comparing the search range.

  If it is determined that a game ball belonging to the search range exists among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3), the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the current detection position (step S304). . “Mark” refers to associating position information of a game ball with an ID. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the position information of the game sphere determined to belong to the search range and the ID of the game sphere serving as a reference for the search range, that is, the ID currently being processed (for example, ID (1)) is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with each other.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets “0” in the re-search number counter (step S305). The value of the re-search count counter is a value added every time the search range is reset (see step S312), and is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of one game ball. In the process of step S305, the sub CPU 201 sets “0” to the re-search number counter associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed.

  Although not shown, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag to ON in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)). The search end flag is a flag indicating that the search process (the process of step S303) for the ID currently being processed is not performed any more. This subroutine is completed on condition that the search end flag is set to ON in association with all IDs (see step S315).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the disappearance flag to OFF (step S306). The disappearance flag is a flag that is set when it is determined in the search process (the process of step S303) that there is no game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3). Yes (see step S310) and stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of one game ball. In the process of step S306, the sub CPU 201 sets the disappearance flag associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed to OFF. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S315.

  In step S303, if it is determined that there is no game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is disappearing in the discharge area. It is determined whether or not (step S307). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball having the ID currently being processed (for example, ID (1)) is a discharge area (any one of the discharge areas 1 to 5) shown in FIG. 39 at time T2. It is judged whether it belonged to. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above-described immediately before discharge flag is set in association with an ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed.

  When it is determined that the game ball having the ID that is currently processed (for example, ID (1)) belongs to the discharge area at time T2, the sub CPU 201 releases the ID (step S308). That is, the sub CPU 201 removes the ID from the management target. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S305.

  In step S307, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball having the ID currently processed (for example, ID (1)) does not belong to the discharge area at the time T2, the sub CPU 201 determines that the ID (for example, ID ( It is determined whether or not the disappearance flag associated with 1)) is set on (step S309).

  When determining that the disappearance flag associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) is not set to ON, the sub CPU 201 determines that the disappearance flag is associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)). Is set to ON (step S310).

  When it is determined in step S309 that the disappearance flag associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) is set to ON, or after executing the process of step S310, the sub CPU 201 determines that the ID ( For example, a search range different from the previously set search range is set again for ID (1)) (step S311). Thereby, based on the reset search range, the search process (the process of step S303) for the ID (for example, ID (1)) is performed again.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the re-search number counter (step S312). In this process, the sub CPU 201 causes the work RAM 203 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the re-search number counter stored in the work RAM 203 as a new value of the re-search number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the re-search number counter is larger than 50 (step S313). When determining that the value of the re-search number counter is larger than 50, the sub CPU 201 ends the search for the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed (step S314). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag to ON in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)).

  When it is determined in step S313 that the value of the re-search number counter is 50 or less, or after executing the process of step S314 or step S306, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the search for all IDs has been completed. (Step S315). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the search end flag is set on in association with the IDs of all the game balls included in the ball position image (T2).

  When determining that the search end flag is not set to ON for at least one game ball ID, the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S302. As a result, the processing from step S302 to step S314 is performed for the ID for which the search has not ended (the ID for which the processing in step S305 or step S314 has not been completed).

  Specifically, a search process (the process of step S303) is performed on the ID to be processed for the first time based on a predetermined search range. On the other hand, for an ID that has already been processed, a search process (the process of step S303) is performed based on the search range reset in step S311.

  If it is determined in step S315 that the search end flag is set to ON in association with the IDs of all the game balls included in the ball position image (T2), the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  The game medium tracking process performed in step S286 in FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S286, the sub CPU 201 executes a process related to overlapping ID maintenance (step S287). In the following, overlapped discrete ID maintenance will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG.

<Overlapping discrete ID maintenance>
FIG. 44A shows the position of the game ball at time T2. FIG. 44B shows the position of the game ball at time T3. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a search range based on the position of the game ball at time T2.

  Similar to FIG. 41 (a), FIG. 44 (a) focuses on two game balls in an image (ball position image (T2)) indicating the position of the game ball at time T2, and these at time T2 The positions of two game balls are shown. The two game balls are assigned IDs ID (1) and ID (2), respectively.

  Similar to FIG. 41 (b), in FIG. 44 (b), attention is paid to two game balls in an image (ball position image (T3)) indicating the position of the game ball at time T3, and these at time T3 are shown. The positions of two game balls are shown. In the figure, the position of one game ball is shown as a game ball 120d, and the position of the other game ball is shown as a game ball 120e. The position of the game ball with ID (1) and the position of the game ball with ID (2) at time T2 are also indicated by virtual lines.

  FIG. 44B shows a state in which the game ball 120d and the game ball 120e are overlapped. In a state where a plurality of game balls are rolling in the game area 12a at the same time, depending on the positional relationship between the game balls and the positional relationship between the game ball and the CCD camera 1000, the game balls are displayed on the image as described above. May overlap.

  In such a case, as shown in FIG. 45, within the search range (see step S302 in FIG. 42) set for one game ball (in this example, the game ball with ID (1)) at time T2. A situation may occur in which two or more game balls belong at time T3. In such a situation, out of two or more game balls belonging to the search range, any game ball is a game ball having an ID serving as a reference for the search range (in the example of FIG. 45, a game ball having ID (1)). Cannot be immediately determined.

  In such a case, the game balls overlap in the ball position image (T3), the position of the game ball before the time T2 (for example, the ball position image (T1) one frame before), and from the time T3. Also refer to the position of the later game ball (for example, the ball position image (T4) after one frame). Thus, in consideration of the existence position, moving direction, speed, etc. of each overlapping game ball in the game area 12a, it becomes a reference for the search range among two or more game balls belonging to the search range. The ID (ID (1) in the example of FIG. 45) is assigned to a gaming ball having a high probability of being an ID game ball (in the example of FIG. 45, the game ball of ID (1)). In this way, the ID can be maintained even when two or more game balls belong to the search range.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when two or more game balls overlap at time T3 (ball position image (T3)), the search range (not shown) is based on the position of the game ball at time T3. When the game ball is tracked at time T4 (ball position image (T4)) (when the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 42 is performed), two or more game balls that overlap (for example, FIG. 44). There is a possibility that the search ranges set for the game ball 120d and the game ball 120e) shown in FIG. Then, the situation that two or more game balls belong to these search ranges at time T4 (ball position image (T4)) may also occur. Even in such a situation, similarly to the above, the manner of overlapping of the game balls in the ball position image (T3), the position of the game ball before the time T3 (for example, the ball position image (T2) before one frame), The ID can be maintained by referring to the position of the game ball after the time T4 (for example, the ball position image (T5) after one frame).

  In addition, although the case where game balls overlap on an image was demonstrated above, the same description is applied fundamentally also when a game ball adjoins (contacts).

  As described above, the process related to maintaining the overlapping discrete ID performed in step S287 of FIG. 31 has been described with reference to FIGS. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S287, the sub CPU 201 executes a process related to clogging / disappearance detection (step S288). Hereinafter, clogging / disappearance detection will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

<Clogging / disappearance detection>
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a ball is clogged with a plurality of game balls on the game board. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing processing related to clogging / disappearance detection executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 48A is a diagram for explaining the disappearance point and the disappearance detection region. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a state where a ball clogging has occurred. FIG. 48C is a diagram for explaining the overlap between game balls and the overlap detection area.

  FIG. 46 shows a state where eight game balls 120f to 120m are stacked between the nails. The eight game balls 120f to 120m are sandwiched between the game board 12 and the protective glass 28 (refer to FIG. 4), thereby causing a clogged ball. These eight game balls 120f to 120m form a so-called “grape” (a lump like a bunch of grapes).

  In pachinko games, such a “grape” is intentionally created by using a magnet, and by using the “grape”, a game ball is guided to a winning opening (starting opening) to obtain a ball. There is a case where a cheating attempt (so-called “grape goto”) is performed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to detect the occurrence of “grape”, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of “grape”. Hereinafter, a method for detecting the occurrence of “grape” (ball clogging) will be described.

In this embodiment, when at least one of the following conditions (i) and (ii) is satisfied, it is determined that a ball clogging has occurred.
(I) A phenomenon (disappearance) that the position of the game ball does not change over a predetermined time occurs more than a predetermined number of times in a predetermined area. (Ii) The position of one game ball and the positions of other game balls Over the image (overlapping) occurs more than a predetermined number within a predetermined area

  Hereinafter, specific processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a game ball that has not moved for a certain period of time (stopped at the same position) (step S351). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 refers to the position information (see step S304 in FIG. 42) associated with the work RAM 203 for all IDs currently managed, and the position information is determined for a predetermined time (a predetermined number of consecutive times). It is determined whether or not they are the same over the entire frame image.

  If it is determined that there is a game ball that has not moved for a certain time (stopped at the same position), the sub CPU 201 releases the ID of the game ball (step S352). When one game ball is stopped at the same position, the position information of the game ball is not included in the difference image when the difference process (see FIG. 36) is executed. Is difficult to do. Therefore, in that case, the sub CPU 201 removes the ID of the game ball from the management target. Note that the processing in step S352 and the next step S353 may be executed after the processing in step S314 in FIG. 42 and before the processing in step S315, for example.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a vanishing point (step S353). In this process, the sub CPU 201 causes the work RAM 203 to separately store position information associated with the ID excluded from the management target in step S352. The vanishing point corresponds to the position information and indicates the stop position of the game ball that has not moved for a certain period of time. FIG. 48A shows a state where the position of the game ball with ID (1) is set as a vanishing point when the game ball of ID (1) stops at a certain position for a certain period of time. The disappearance point setting is canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S351 that there is no game ball that has not moved for a certain period of time, or after executing the process of step S353, the sub CPU 201 sets a predetermined number (for example, three) or more vanishing points. It is determined whether or not (step S354).

  If it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) or more vanishing points have been set, the sub CPU 201 sets a vanishing detection area (step S355). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a predetermined range that is set with reference to the vanishing point that is set first among the predetermined number or more of vanishing points as a region for erasure detection. FIG. 48 (a) shows a state in which a disappearance detection region is set with reference to the position when the game ball with ID (1) stays at a certain position for a certain period of time or longer. The disappearance detection area is set as a certain range including a reference disappearance point.

  Specifically, the disappearance detection area is set in advance according to each position in the sphere position image, and a table showing the correspondence between the position information in the sphere position image and the disappearance detection area is stored in the program ROM 202. Has been. In step S355, the sub CPU 201 refers to the table stored in the program ROM 202, and based on the position information corresponding to the reference vanishing point (the vanishing point set first), The area set accordingly is determined as the disappearance detection area.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there are a predetermined number (for example, three) or more disappearance points in the disappearance detection area set in step S355 (step S356). In this process, if at least a part of the disappearance points belong to the disappearance detection area, the sub CPU 201 determines that the disappearance points exist in the disappearance detection area. If the sub CPU 201 determines that there are less than a predetermined number (for example, three) of erasure points in the erasure detection area, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there are a predetermined number (for example, three) or more erasure points in the erasure detection area, the sub CPU 201 performs a clogging determination (step S357). The fact that there are more than a predetermined number of disappearance points in the disappearance detection area means that “the phenomenon (disappearance) that the position of the game ball does not change over a predetermined time in the disappearance detection area has occurred more than a predetermined number of times.” (See condition (i) above). In FIG. 48 (b), in the disappearance detection area shown in FIG. 48 (a), in addition to the game ball of ID (1), the game ball of ID (2) and the game ball of ID (3) each have a predetermined time. It is shown that the ball is determined to be clogged because it has stopped for a period of time. The ball clogging point indicates the approximate position where the ball clogging occurred.

  In the process of step S357, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, an image informing that the clogging has occurred on the liquid crystal display device 13 or outputs a sound informing that the clogging has occurred from the speaker 11. . Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball clogging occurrence signal indicating that a ball clogging has occurred to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The ball clogging generation signal may include information indicating a ball clogging point. After executing the process of step S357, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S354 that less than a predetermined number (for example, three) of lost points are set, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a game ball that overlaps with another game ball (step S354). S358). Although it has been described that the present subroutine is ended when it is determined in step S356 that there are less than a predetermined number (for example, three) of erasure points in the erasure detection area, the process of step S358 is also performed in this case. It is good also as shifting to. In the process of step S358, the sub CPU 201 obtains the spherical position image (for example, the spherical position image (T3) shown in FIG. 44B) obtained by the difference extraction process between the preceding and following frames (see FIGS. 33 to 37). In the above, it is determined whether or not the game balls overlap.

  In FIG. 48 (c), attention is paid to three game balls in an image (ball position image (T3)) showing the positions of the game balls at time T3, and the positions of these three game balls at time T3 are shown. ing. With the above-described game medium tracking process (see step S304 in FIG. 42), IDs of ID (1), ID (2), and ID (3) are assigned to the three game balls, respectively. On the image, the game ball with ID (1) and the game ball with ID (2) overlap, and the game ball with ID (1) and the game ball with ID (3) overlap. In the figure, the overlapping portion of the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (2) and the overlap portion of the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (3) are shaded, respectively. Is shown. In the process of step S358, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not such an overlap has occurred (whether or not there is an overlap portion on the sphere position image).

  If it is determined that no overlap has occurred, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that an overlap has occurred, the sub CPU 201 sets an overlap detection region (step S359). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 firstly selects the game ball (firstly assigned to the ID) among the game balls having overlapping portions (portions indicated by hatching in FIG. 48C) with other game balls. A predetermined range set with reference to the position of the game ball that has passed through the emission area is set as an overlap detection area. FIG. 48C shows a state in which an overlap detection area is set with reference to the position of the game ball with ID (1). The overlap detection area is set as a certain range including a reference game ball.

  Specifically, the overlap detection area is set in advance according to each position in the sphere position image, and a table indicating the correspondence between the position information in the sphere position image and the overlap detection area is stored in the program ROM 202. Has been. In step S359, the sub CPU 201 refers to the table stored in the program ROM 202, and determines the position information based on the position information of the reference game ball (the first game ball to which an ID is assigned). The area set accordingly is determined as an overlap detection area.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, five) or more overlaps have occurred in the overlap detection area set in step S359 (step S360). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of overlaps (the overlap portion) existing in the overlap detection area is a predetermined number (for example, 5) or more. If at least a part of the overlap (overlap portion) belongs to the overlap detection region, the sub CPU 201 determines that the overlap (overlap portion) exists in the overlap detection region. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of overlaps (overlaps) existing in the overlap detection area is less than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of overlaps (overlaps) existing in the overlap detection area is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the sub CPU 201 performs a ball clogging determination (step S361). The fact that the number of overlapping portions existing in the overlap detection area is a predetermined number or more means that “the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap on the image in the overlap detection area ( "Overlap) has occurred more than a predetermined number" (see condition (ii) above).

  For example, in addition to the game balls of ID (1) to ID (3) shown in FIG. 48C, game balls of ID (4) to ID (6) (not shown) exist in the overlap detection area, and ID (1 ) And ID (4) game balls overlap, ID (2) game balls and ID (5) game balls overlap, ID (5) game balls and ID (6) ), And all of these overlaps (overlapping portions) exist within the overlap detection region, the number of overlaps existing within the overlap detection region is five. In this case, if the “predetermined number” = 5, the condition (ii) is satisfied and it is determined that the ball is clogged.

  In the ball clogging determination in step S361, the sub CPU 201 performs the same process as in step S357. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  The processing related to clogging / disappearance detection performed in step S288 of FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S288, the sub CPU 201 ends the camera video analysis processing shown in FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above as an embodiment of the present invention.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, it corresponds to the difference between the frame image taken at time T1 (first frame image) and the frame image taken at time T2 (second frame image). Difference image (1) and a difference image (2) corresponding to the difference between the frame image (second frame image) captured at time T2 and the frame image (third frame image) captured at time T3. ) Is created. Here, in addition to the change in the position of the game ball, an environmental change in the game area 12a occurred between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the second frame image (time T2). In this case, the environmental change appears in the difference image (1). Similarly, in addition to the change in the position of the game ball, an environmental change in the game area 12a occurred between the shooting timing of the second frame image (time T2) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3). In this case, the environmental change appears in the difference image (2). However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the appearance of such an environmental change in the difference image is removed by taking the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). Is possible. Thereby, even when such an environmental change (for example, a change in external light) occurs, the position of the game ball is grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence on the image caused by the environmental change. be able to.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, each frame image may include an effect LED in the following states (i) to (iv).
(I) First frame image: off state, second frame image: off state, third frame image: on state (ii) first frame image: off state, second frame image: on state, Third frame image: lighting state (iii) First frame image: lighting state, second frame image: off state, third frame image: off state (iv) First frame image: lighting state, 2 Frame image: lit state, third frame image: unlit state

  In the cases (i) and (iv), the difference image (1) does not include the effect LED, and the difference image (2) includes the difference resulting from the state change of the effect LED. In the cases (ii) and (iii), the difference image (1) includes a difference due to the state change of the effect LED, and the difference image (2) does not include the effect LED. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in any of the cases (i) to (iv) described above, the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is obtained. It is possible to remove the LED from the image. Thereby, even if it is a case where the state of effect LED changes in any aspect of said (i)-(iv), the position of a game ball can be grasped | ascertained with high precision, eliminating the influence.

  If the effect LED is provided in a place other than the game area 12a on the game board 12, the effect LED can be removed from the image by setting the position where the effect LED is present as the masking area. is there. Thereby, it can also prevent that production LED is mistakenly detected as a game ball.

  The position information of the game ball obtained as described above is appropriately transmitted to various devices and used for various controls such as effects. For example, the trajectory of the game ball may be visualized by displaying the obtained position information of the game ball on the liquid crystal display device 13. At this time, if the game balls are displayed in different colors for each ID, the movements of a large number of game balls rolling in the game area 12a can be individually tracked for each game ball.

  Such game ball tracking can be realized by the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. In the game medium tracking process, a game ball that existed at a certain position at time T2 (at a certain time) moved from the existing position at time T2 to a position at a short distance at time T3 (after the time corresponding to one frame had elapsed). I explained it on the assumption. In the game ball tracking in this embodiment, in addition to the distance, information that appears in the difference image when performing the difference process (such as the luminance of the part corresponding to the game ball) and the above-described information such as disappearance and overlap are taken into account. Then, the processing may be performed.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the position of one game ball has not changed over a predetermined number of consecutive frame images, “disappear” for the one game ball. Is recognized as occurring. Then, within a predetermined range (disappearance detection area) based on the position of the one game ball in the frame image, N (for example, two) or more game balls other than the one game ball are also “disappeared”. "Is recognized as having occurred, it is recognized that" ball clogging "has occurred. As a result, it is possible to detect the occurrence of “ball clogging” due to the stacking of game balls, and eliminate the problem caused by “ball clogging” (for example, to prevent “grape goto”) ) You can get an opportunity.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap on the image, the one game ball and the other game ball. It is recognized that “overlap” has occurred with the sphere. In addition to “overlap” between the one game ball and the other game ball within a predetermined range (overlap detection region) based on the position of the one game ball in the frame image, M When it is recognized that more than four (for example, four) “overlaps” have occurred, it is recognized that “ball clogging” has occurred. As a result, it is possible to detect the occurrence of “ball clogging” due to the stacking of game balls, and eliminate the problem caused by “ball clogging” (for example, to prevent “grape goto”) ) You can get an opportunity.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to gaming machines other than the pachinko gaming machine. In the following second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine is described. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to devices other than gaming machines as long as the device includes a region where an object can move.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is tracked in the pachinko gaming machine has been described. A game ball in a pachinko gaming machine corresponds to an object in the present invention. The object in the present invention is not limited to this example, and any movable object can be appropriately employed. 2nd Embodiment demonstrates the example which employ | adopted as a target object the medal used for a pachislot gaming machine.

  Further, in the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a game area in a pachinko gaming machine is a shooting target. The game area in the pachinko gaming machine corresponds to the shooting target area in the present invention. The imaging target area in the present invention is not limited to this example, and an arbitrary area where the object can move can be appropriately adopted. In the second embodiment, an example is described in which an area (medal rail) in which a medal used for a pachislot machine is movable is adopted as an imaging target area.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31) is performed in the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) has been described. In the present invention, the circuit for performing image processing is not limited to the sub control circuit (effect control circuit), and image processing (camera video analysis processing) may be performed in a display control circuit, a sound / LED control circuit, or the like. . Further, the photographing apparatus (camera) itself (a control LSI provided in the camera) may perform the camera video analysis process. When camera video analysis processing is performed by a control circuit other than the production control circuit, all of the camera video analysis processing may be performed by the control circuit, or only part of the camera video analysis processing is performed by the control circuit, and the rest This process may be performed by another control circuit. As described above, the image processing according to the present invention may be performed by being shared by a plurality of control circuits. Also, when the camera video analysis process is performed by a control circuit other than the effect control circuit, the analysis result is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and the effect control circuit selects the effect pattern based on the analysis result. Good. Further, control is performed so as to track the game ball by analyzing the camera image by the display control circuit or the like without using the effect control circuit (for example, displaying the movement of the game ball on the liquid crystal display device as described above). Only the tracking result may be fed back to the effect control circuit.

[Second Embodiment]
As described above, in the second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine will be described. More specifically, an example will be described in which an area where a medal used for a pachislot machine is movable (medal rail) is photographed with a camera. In the following description, the description of the portion in which the description in the first embodiment applies also in the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. As game media, in addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be targeted.

  At the start of the game, when a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Is done.

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, re-games, bonuses, etc. are given to players, and other so-called “loses”. Is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is responsible for a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol.

  When the internal winning combination allowing the symbol combination display related to winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually displays the symbol combination within the specified time of 190 msec (four symbols) for the winning determination line. The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is defined for one or more reels when, for example, a challenge bonus (CB), which is a second-type special accessory, and a middle bonus (MB) for continuously operating the CB are operated. The reel rotation is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. This winning determination means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that it is related to winning, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game.

  Further, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried out by a sub-control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether there is a winning. In this way, in the pachislot, the player is given an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislo 2001 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot 2001. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the pachislot 2001 includes an exterior body 2002. The exterior body 2002 includes a cabinet 2002a that houses a hopper device 2051, a medal auxiliary storage 2052, and the like (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, and a front door 2002b that is attached to the cabinet 2002a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 2007 are provided on both sides of the cabinet 2002a (FIG. 50 shows only the handle 2007 on one side). This handle 2007 is a concave portion to be put on when carrying the pachislot 2001.

  Inside the exterior body 2002, three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R are referred to as a left reel 2003L, a middle reel 2003C, and a right reel 2003R, respectively. Each of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material attached to the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The front door 2002b includes a door body 2009, a front panel 2010, and a liquid crystal display device 2011 showing a specific example of the display device.

  The door main body 2009 is attached to the cabinet 2002a using a hinge (not shown), and opens and closes the opening of the cabinet 2002a. The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 2009 when the door body 2009 is viewed from the front of the pachislot 2001. The liquid crystal display device 2011 is attached to the upper part of the door main body 2009. The liquid crystal display device 2011 includes a display unit (display screen) 2011a, and the liquid crystal display device 2011 performs an effect by displaying an image.

  The front panel 2010 is disposed to overlap the display unit 2011a side of the liquid crystal display device 2011, and is formed in a frame shape having a panel opening 2010a that exposes the display unit 2011a of the liquid crystal display device 2011. A lamp group 2018 is provided on the front panel 2010. The lamp group 2018 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

  A pedestal portion 2012 is formed in the center of the front door 2002b. The pedestal portion 2012 is provided with a symbol display area 2004 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 2004 is arranged on the front side superimposed on the three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R. The symbol display area 2004 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting through the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R provided behind the display window. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 2004 is referred to as a reel display window 2004.

  When the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R are stopped from rotating, the reel display window 2004 has an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage within the frame among the plural types of symbols of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a target for determining whether or not to win a pseudo line configured by combining any one of the three areas including the upper, middle, and lower stages of the reel display window 2004 is determined. Is defined as a line (winning determination line).

  The reel display window 2004 is formed by a frame member 2013 provided on the pedestal portion 2012. The frame member 2013 includes a reel display window 2004, an information display window 2014, and a stop button attachment portion 2015.

  The information display window 2014 is provided continuously below the reel display window 2004 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 2004 and the information display window 2014 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 2014 and the reel display window 2004 are covered with a transparent window cover 2016.

  The window cover 2016 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 2013 and cannot be removed from the front surface side of the front door 2002b. Further, the frame member 2013 has a sheet placement portion 2017 facing the opening of the information display window 2014 with the window cover 2016 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 2017 and the window cover 2016, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 2016 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps.

  The window cover 2016 that constitutes the information sheet attachment portion is non-removable from the front side of the front door 2002b and has a smooth surface with no irregularities or gaps. Therefore, using the information sheet attachment portion, the pachislot 2001 is used. Can prevent fraudulent access to the inside.

  The stop button attachment portion 2015 is provided below the information display window 2014 and is formed on a plane facing the front. The stop button attachment portion 2015 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R pass. Stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R are associated with each of the three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R are referred to as a left stop button 2019L, a middle stop button 2019C, and a right stop button 2019R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R are examples of various devices that are targets of operations by the player. In addition, the pedestal portion 2012 is provided with a medal slot 2021, a BET button 2022, and a start lever 2023 as various devices to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 2021 is provided to accept a medal dropped from the outside by the player. The medals received in the medal slot 2021 are inserted into one game with a predetermined number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the specified number is deposited inside the pachislot 2001. (So-called credit function).

  The BET button 2022 is provided for determining the number of coins to be inserted into one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 2001. The start lever 2023 is provided to start rotation of all reels (2003L, 2003C, 2003R).

  A 7-segment display 2024 made up of 7-segment LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 2004 when the front door 2002b is viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 2024 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited in the pachislot (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits). .

  A settlement button 2027 is provided on the left side of the pedestal 2012 when the front door 2002b is viewed from the front. The checkout button 2027 is provided to draw out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot 2001. Below the pedestal 2012, a waist panel unit 2031 is provided. The waist panel unit 2031 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the waist panel unit 2031, a medal payout opening 2032, speaker holes 2033 L and 2033 R, and a medal tray unit 2034 are provided. The medal payout opening 2032 guides medals discharged from a medal selector 2201 described later and medals discharged by driving a hopper device 2051 described later. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 2032 are stored in the medal tray unit 2034. The speaker holes 2033L and 2033R are provided for outputting sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of effects.

[Internal structure]
51 and 52 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachislot 2001. FIG. FIG. 51 shows a state where the front door 2002b is opened and the middle door 2041 provided on the back side of the front door 2002b is closed with respect to the front door 2002b. FIG. 52 shows a state where the front door 2002b is opened and the middle door 2041 is opened with respect to the front door 2002b. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing the inside of the cabinet 2002a. FIG. 54 is an explanatory view showing the back side of the front door 2002b.

  The cabinet 2002a includes a top plate 2020a, a bottom plate 2020b, left and right side plates 2020c and 2020d, and a back plate 2020e (see FIG. 53). A cabinet-side speaker 2042 is disposed on the upper side inside the cabinet 2002a. The cabinet-side speaker 2042 is attached to the back plate 2020e of the cabinet 2002a via attachment brackets 2043L and 2043R. The cabinet-side speaker 2042 is a speaker for outputting sound effects, for example.

  A cabinet-side relay board 2044 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 2042 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front. The cabinet side relay board 2044 is attached to the left side plate 2020c of the cabinet 2002a. The cabinet-side relay board 2044 includes a main control board 2071 (see FIG. 56), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 2041 (see FIGS. 51 and 52), a hopper device 2051, a medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), and a medal payout. The wiring connecting the count switch (not shown) is relayed.

  An amplifier board 2045 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 2042 is disposed in the center of the cabinet 2002a. The amplifier board 2045 is attached to a mounting shelf 2046 fixed to the left and right side plates 2020c and 2020d.

  Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 2047 is disposed on the right side of the amplifier board 2045 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 53). The external concentrated terminal plate 2047 is attached to the right side plate 2020d of the cabinet 2002a. The external concentration terminal board 2047 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub power supply device 2048 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier substrate 2045 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply device 2048 is attached to the left side plate 2020c of the cabinet 2002a. The sub power supply device 2048 supplies power with an AC voltage of 100 V to a power supply device 2053 described later. In addition, the power of AC voltage 100V is converted to the power of DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 2045.

  On the lower side inside the cabinet 2002a, a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 2051, a medal auxiliary storage 2052, and a power supply device 2053 are arranged.

  The hopper device 2051 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 2020b in the cabinet 2002a. The hopper device 2051 has a structure that can accommodate a large amount of medals and can discharge them one by one. The hopper device 2051, for example, discharges the stored medals for the number of credits when the settlement button 2027 (see FIG. 50) is pressed to settle the medals deposited inside the pachislot. The medals paid out by the hopper device 2051 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 2032 (see FIG. 50).

  The medal auxiliary storage 2052 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 2051. The medal auxiliary storage 2052 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 2051 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 2052 is engaged with the bottom plate 2020b of the cabinet 2002a, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate 2020b.

  The power supply device 2053 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 2051 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 2020c. The power supply device 2053 includes a power switch 2053a and a power supply board 2053b (see FIG. 56). The power supply device 2053 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 2048 into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 51, 52, and 54, the middle door 2041 is disposed at the center of the back surface of the front door 2002 b and is configured to be able to open and close the reel display window 2004 (see FIG. 52) from the back side. Door stoppers 2041a, 2041b, and 2041c are provided on the upper and lower portions of the middle door 2041. The door stoppers 2041a, 2041b, and 2041c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 2041 with the reel display window 2004 closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 2041, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 2041a, 2041b, and 2041c to release the middle door 2041 from being fixed.

  A main control board case 2055 that houses a main control board 2071 (see FIG. 56) and three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R are attached to the middle door 2041. Stepping motors are connected to the three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the main control board case 2055 is provided with a setting key type switch 2056. This setting key switch 2056 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 2001 or confirming the setting of the pachislot 2001. In the present embodiment, a main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 2055 and the main control board 2071 accommodated in the main control board case 2055.

  The main control board 2071 accommodated in the main control board case 2055 constitutes a main control circuit 2091 (see FIG. 57) described later. The main control circuit 2091 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 2001, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. A specific configuration of the main control circuit 2091 will be described later.

  A sub-control board case 2057 that accommodates the sub-control board 2072 (see FIG. 56) is disposed above the middle door 2041, and a center speaker 2058 is disposed above the sub-control board case 2057. The sub control board 2072 accommodated in the sub control board case 2057 constitutes a sub control circuit 2101 (see FIG. 58). The sub-control circuit 2101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 2101 will be described later.

  A sub relay board 2061 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 2057 when the front door 2002b is viewed from the back side. The sub-relay board 2061 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 2072 and the main control board 2071. In addition, it is a board that relays a wiring that connects the sub-control board 2072 and the board disposed around the sub-control board 2072. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board 2072, LED board 2062A, 2062B, 2062C mentioned later is mentioned.

  The LED boards 2062A, 2062B, and 2062C are disposed on both sides of the sub control board case 2057 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2002b. These LED boards 2062A, 2062B, and 2062C have a plurality of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 2082 (see FIG. 56) showing a specific example of the light source in accordance with the effects executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 2101 (see FIG. 58). ) To display a blinking pattern. Note that the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 2062A, 2062B, and 2062C.

  A 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 2063 is disposed below the sub-relay board 2061. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 2063 stores the opening / closing history of the middle door 2041. When the middle door 2041 is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 2011 is output to the sub control board 2072 (sub control circuit 2101).

  Below the middle door 2041, a board speaker 2064 and lower speakers 2065L and 2065R are arranged. The board speaker 2064 faces the waist panel unit 2031 (see FIG. 50), and the lower speakers 2065L and 2065R face the speaker holes 2033L and 2033R (see FIG. 50), respectively.

  Above the lower speaker 2065L, a medal selector 2201, a medal chute 2202, and a door open / close monitoring switch 2067 are arranged. The medal selector 2201 is a device that determines whether or not the medal material, shape, and the like are appropriate. The medal selector 2201 guides the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 2021 to the hopper device 2051 via the slope 2203 or the medal. Guide to the chute 2202. A specific configuration of the medal selector 2201 will be described later.

  The medal chute 2202 is a substantially Y-shaped tubular member, and guides the medal guided by the medal selector 2201 and the medal discharged from the hopper device 2051 to the medal payout opening 2032 (see FIG. 50).

  The door open / close monitoring switch 2067 is arranged on the left side of the medal selector 2201 when the front door 2002b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 2067 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2002b to the outside of the pachislot 2001.

  In addition, a door relay terminal plate 2068 is disposed in a region below the reel display window 4 and opened and closed by the middle door 2041 (see FIG. 52). The door relay terminal board 2068 includes a main control board 2071 (see FIG. 56) in the main control board case 2055, various buttons and switches, a sub-control board 2072 (see FIG. 56), a medal selector 2201, and a game operation display board. It is a substrate that relays wiring with 2081 (see FIG. 56). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 2022, a checkout button 2027, a door open / close monitoring switch 2067, a BET switch 2077, a start switch 2079, which will be described later, and the like.

<Medal movement route>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a movement path of medals when the medal selector guides medals to the hopper device.

  As shown in FIG. 55, at the upper end of the medal selector 2201, a medal entrance 2211 for receiving medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 2021 (see FIG. 50) is provided. The medals (medals 2120a, 2120b, 2120c) inserted into the medal selector 2201 from the medal entrance 2211 move from the top to the bottom along the medal rail 2210. A medal exit 2204 is provided below the medal selector 2201. The medals (medals 2120a, 2120b, 2120c) that have moved in the medal selector 2201 are discharged from the medal outlet 2204 and are accommodated in the hopper device 2051 via the slope 2203 (see FIG. 52).

  Although not shown, the medal selector 2201 is provided with a camera unit. The camera unit is a unit for determining whether or not the object moving on the medal rail 2210 is a regular medal. The camera unit is provided with a CMOS image sensor, an LED, and a control LSI.

  The CMOS image sensor is arranged so that the entire medal rail 2210 can be imaged. The medal moving on the medal rail 2210 (medals 2120a, 2120b, 2120c) is imaged, and the image data of the imaged medal is used as a control LSI. Output. The LED emits light around the CMOS image sensor and irradiates light on the medal moving on the medal rail 2210. The control LSI determines whether the object moving on the medal rail 2210 is a regular medal based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor. In addition, the control LSI performs predetermined processing (the same processing as the camera video analysis processing shown in FIG. 31) on the image data, thereby determining whether or not the medals are flowing normally on the medal rail 2210. Can be determined.

<Pachislot circuit configuration>
Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislot 2001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. First, an overview of the entire circuit included in the pachislot 2001 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit provided in the pachi-slot 1.

  The pachislot 2001 includes a main control board 2071 disposed on the middle door 2041 and a sub control board 2072 disposed on the front door 2002b. The main control board 2071 includes a reel relay terminal board 2074, a setting key switch 2056, an external concentrated terminal board 2047, a hopper device 2051, a medal auxiliary storage switch 2075, and a power board 2053b of the power unit 2053. It is connected. The setting key switch 2056, the external concentration terminal board 2047, the hopper device 2051, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 2075 are connected to the main control board 2071 via the cabinet-side relay board 2044. Since the external concentration terminal board 2047 and the hopper device 2051 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted.

  The reel relay terminal plate 2074 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 2003L, 2003C, 2003R. The reel relay terminal plate 2074 is electrically connected to the stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R, and relays signals output from the main control board 2071 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 2075 passes through a switch through hole (not shown) of the medal auxiliary storage 2052. This medal auxiliary storage switch 2075 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 2052 is full of medals.

  A power switch 2053 a is connected to the power supply substrate 2053 b of the power supply device 2053. The power switch 2053a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachislot 2001.

  The main control board 2071 is connected to a medal selector 2201, a door open / close monitoring switch 2067, a BET switch 2077, a settlement switch 2078, a start switch 2079, a stop switch board 2080, and a game operation display board 2081 via a door relay terminal board 2068. The sub-relay board 2061 is connected. Since the door opening / closing monitoring switch 2067 and the sub relay board 2061 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The BET switch 2077 detects that the BET button 2022 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 2078 detects that the settlement button 2027 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 2079 detects that the start lever 2023 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch substrate 2080 is a substrate that constitutes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 2080 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 2081 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 2024 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 2024 and an LED 2082 are connected to the game operation display board 2081. For example, the LED 2082 lights a mark for displaying the start of a game, a mark for replaying, and the like.

  The sub control board 2072 is connected to the main control board 2071 through the door relay terminal board 2068 and the sub relay board 2061. A sound I / O board 2084, LED boards 2062A, 2062B, 2062C, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 2063 are connected to the sub control board 2072 via a sub relay board 2061. Since these LED substrates 2062A, 2062B, 2062C and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 2063 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The sound I / O board 2084 outputs sound to a center speaker 2058, a board speaker 2064, lower speakers 2065L and 2065R, and a speaker (not shown) provided on the front door 2002b.

  Further, a ROM cartridge substrate 2086 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 2087 are connected to the sub control substrate 2072. The ROM cartridge substrate 2086 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 2087 are housed in the sub control board case 2057 together with the sub control board 2072. The ROM cartridge substrate 2086 is a substrate for managing production images (video), sound, LED substrates 2062A and 2062B, other LED substrates (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 2087 is a substrate that relays the wiring connecting the sub control substrate 2072 and the liquid crystal display device 2011.

[Main control circuit]
Next, the main control circuit 2091 constituted by the main control board 2071 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 2091 of the pachislot 2001.

  The main control circuit 2091 includes a microcomputer 2092 installed on the main control board 2071 as a main component. The microcomputer 2092 includes a main CPU 2093, a main ROM 2094, and a main RAM 2095.

  A control program (for example, a program for executing the internal lottery process described above) executed by the main CPU 2093, a data table, and various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 2101 are transmitted to the main ROM 2094. Data etc. are stored. The main RAM 2095 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 2093 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 2096, a frequency divider 2097, a random number generator 2098, and a sampling circuit 2099. The clock pulse generation circuit 2096 and the frequency divider 2097 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 2093 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 2098 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 2099 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 2093 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 2093 manages the rotation angle of each reel 2003L, 2003C, 2003R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. For example, the reel index is provided at a predetermined position of each of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R, and includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) including a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, management of the rotation angles of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 2095. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 2095 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 2003L, 2003C, 2003R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the positions of the symbols on the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R are detected based on the position at which the reel index is detected.

  As described above, when the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four symbols, the symbol of the left reel 2003L in the middle of the reel display window 2004 when the left stop button 2019L is pressed, and the four symbols. Each symbol within the range up to the previous symbol becomes a symbol that can be stopped at the middle stage of the reel display window 2004.

[Sub control circuit]
Next, the sub control circuit 2101 constituted by the sub control board 2072 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 2101 of the pachislot 2001.

  The sub control circuit 2101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 2091 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2091. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 2102, a sub RAM 2103, a rendering processor 2104, a drawing RAM 2105, and a driver 2106.

  The sub CPU 2102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 2086 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 2091. The ROM cartridge substrate 2086 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The program storage area stores a control program executed by the sub CPU 2102. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 2091 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Is included. In addition, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 2011 (see FIG. 50) based on the determined content of presentation, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as the LED 2082, and the speakers 2058, 2064, 2065L , 2065R and the like, and a voice control task for controlling the sound output by the speaker.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Also included are a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 2103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 2102, the rendering processor 2104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 2105, and the two drivers 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the effect, and cause the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the created video.

  Further, the sub CPU 2102 causes a sound such as BGM to be output from speakers such as speakers 2058, 2064, 2065L, and 2065R in accordance with the sound data designated by the contents of the presentation. Further, the sub CPU 2102 controls the turning on and off of the light source such as the LED 2082 according to the lamp data specified by the contents of the effect.

  The pachislot 2001 according to the second embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

  According to the pachislot 2001 according to the second embodiment, the camera video analysis process (see FIG. 31) is executed by the control LSI included in the camera unit disposed in the medal selector 2201. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not medals are flowing normally on the medal rail 2210. Further, by executing the processing related to clogging / disappearance detection (see FIG. 47), for example, when a medal is jammed in the medal rail 2210, it is possible to detect the medal clogging. Note that such a camera video analysis result is transmitted to the main control circuit 2091 (see FIG. 57) and the sub control circuit 2101 (see FIG. 58), and processing based on the analysis result (for example, FIG. 47). Step S357 and Step S361) can be executed.

  In the second embodiment, it has been described that the camera video analysis process (see FIG. 31) is executed by the control LSI provided in the camera unit. Hereinafter, as a modification, a case where the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31) is executed in the sub control circuit 2101 will be described. In this modification, the control LSI included in the camera unit transmits frame image data to the sub control circuit 2101 in response to a request from the sub CPU 2102 constituting the sub control circuit 2101. The processing executed in the sub-control circuit 2101 is substantially the same as the processing of FIGS. 26 to 31 described in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted here. Hereinafter, processing executed in the main control circuit 2091 will be described.

[Main control main processing]
First, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, main control main processing by the control of the main CPU 2093 will be described. 59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main control main process of the pachislot 2001.

  First, when power is turned on to the pachislot 2001, the main CPU 2093 performs power-on processing (step S1001). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or the setting has been changed appropriately, and an initialization process is executed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (unit game) (step S1002). In this process, for example, the main CPU 2093 initializes by specifying a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. By this initialization process, data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 2095 is cleared.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (step S1003). In this process, the main CPU 2093 determines whether or not a winning operation is possible and a winning determination line is enabled based on the number of inserted coins.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 extracts random values and stores them in a random value storage area (step S1004). This random value is used in an internal lottery process (step S1006) described later. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 extracts the effect random number value and stores it in the effect random number storage area (step S1005). This effect random number value is used in the lock determination process. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs an internal lottery process (step S1006). In this process, the main CPU 2093 determines an internal winning combination. The internal winning combination is determined by performing lottery based on an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (general gaming state, bonus gaming state, RT gaming state, etc.).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs reel stop initial setting processing (step S1007). In this process, the main CPU 2093 initializes an area related to control for stopping the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 generates start command data, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1008). The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101 in communication data transmission processing (FIG. 62) described later. The start command includes various kinds of information (internal winning combination, gaming state, etc.) necessary for production such as internal winning combination. Thereby, the sub control circuit 2101 can produce an effect according to the start operation.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a game start lock process (step S1009). In this process, the main CPU 2093 determines whether to delay the timing for starting the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R based on the internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a wait process (step S1010). In this process, the main CPU 2093 waits until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses from the start of the previous game or until a lock time (for example, 5 seconds) set in the game start lock process elapses. To do. Note that the lock time set by the game start lock process may be digested by invalidating the stop operation of the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R after the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R is started. In this case, the player can recognize that the player is locked because the stop operation is not possible despite the rotation being started. Further, during this locking, the reel may be rotated slowly or reversely (reel action) to make it easier to recognize that it is being locked.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a reel rotation start process (step S1011). In this process, the main CPU 2093 requests the start of rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, and stores a reel rotation start command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1012). The reel rotation start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101 in the communication data transmission process (FIG. 62). By this processing, the sub control circuit 2101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a pull-in priority storage process (step S1013). Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a reel stop control process (step S1014).

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a winning search process (step S1015). In this process, the main CPU 2093 collates the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line after the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R are stopped with the symbol combination table, determines the display combination, and determines the number of medals to be paid out. I do.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs RT control processing (step S1016). In this process, the RT gaming state flag is updated according to the display combination.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 pays out medals based on the payout number of medals determined in step S1015 (step S1017). Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 stores the winning operation command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1018). The stored winning action command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2101 in a communication data transmission process (FIG. 62) of an interrupt process described later.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a lock process at the end of the game (step S1019). In this process, the main CPU 2093 determines whether to lock the progress of the game based on the internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a bonus end check process (step S1020). In this process, the main CPU 2093 ends the operation of the bonus game when a condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied. Specifically, in this process, the main CPU 2093 subtracts the number of medals paid out (see step S1015) from the value of the bonus end number counter, and when the value of the bonus end number counter becomes smaller than zero. The bonus game is terminated. Examples of the bonus game include a BB gaming state and an MB gaming state.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a bonus operation check process (step S1021), and then performs a process of step S1002. In this process, the main CPU 2093 starts the bonus game when the conditions for starting the bonus game are satisfied, and performs the replay operation when the conditions for the replay are satisfied. Specifically, in this process, when the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is a symbol combination corresponding to BB (or MB), the main CPU 2093 starts the bonus game operation, and the bonus end number counter A predetermined value is set in.

[Interrupt processing]
In the pachislot 2001 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 2093 interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.1173 mS) and executes the interrupt process even during execution of the main process. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of interrupt processing.

  First, the main CPU 2093 saves the register (step S1031). Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs an input port check process (step S1032). In this process, the main CPU 2093 checks the presence / absence of a signal transmitted to the microcomputer 2092. For example, the main CPU 2093 stores on-edges and off-edges such as a start switch 2079 and a stop switch for each interrupt process. The main CPU 2093 stores an input state command including information on the on-edge and off-edge of various switches in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2101 in communication data transmission processing to be described later. Accordingly, various effects can be executed using the operation means such as the start lever 2023 and the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs timer update processing (step S1033). Next, the main CPU 2093 performs communication data transmission processing to be described later (step S1034). In this process, the command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2101. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs processing for controlling the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R (step S1035). More specifically, the main CPU 2093 starts the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R in response to a request for starting the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, that is, in response to the start operation. Control is performed so that 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R rotate. Further, in accordance with the stop operation, control is performed so that the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R corresponding to the stop operation is stopped.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a lamp / 7SEG drive process (step S1036). For example, the main CPU 2093 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, etc. on various display units. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 restores the register (step S1037), and terminates the interrupt processing that occurs periodically.

[Communication data transmission processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a communication data transmission process subroutine called in the process of step S1034 of FIG. First, the main CPU 2093 decrements the communication data transmission timer by 1 (step S1051), and then determines whether the communication data transmission timer is 0 (step S1052). When the communication data transmission timer is 0 (when step S1052 is YES), the main CPU 2093 shifts the process to step S1053. On the other hand, if the communication data transmission timer is not 0 in step S1052 (if step S1052 is NO), the main CPU 2093 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1053, the main CPU 2093 determines whether there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area. When there is untransmitted data (when YES is determined in step S1053), the main CPU 2093 shifts the process to step S1055, and when there is no untransmitted data (when NO is determined in step S1053), the main CPU 2093 shifts the process to step S1054.

  In step S1054, the main CPU 2093 generates no-operation command data, and stores the generated no-operation command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095. That is, when there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area, the main CPU 2093 stores no-operation command data in the communication data storage area. As a result, a state in which command data to be transmitted is always stored in the communication data storage area is generated. Specifically, the main CPU 2093 generates the operation state stored in the main RAM 2095 as a no-operation command in the input port check process (step S1032) described above. The data representing the operation state generated as the no-operation command has the condition that the no-operation command is transmitted (the input state command has been transmitted and cleared) in the subsequent communication data transmission process (step S1056). When established, the data is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101. The input state command is command data related to the effect, and means an operation corresponding command for the effect corresponding to the operation of the switch or the like. On the other hand, the no-operation command is a command (operation non-corresponding command) transmitted when an operation corresponding command such as an input state command is not transmitted.

  Note that it is not essential to transmit a no-operation command to the sub-control circuit 2101 when there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area, and the processing in step S1053 and step S1054 may not be performed.

  In step S1055, the main CPU 2093 sets an initial value (16) in the communication data transmission timer. That is, since the communication data transmission timer is 0 in step S1052, the main CPU 2093 sets the initial value (16) in the communication data transmission timer again in step S1055. As a result, every time the communication data transmission process is performed from the next communication data transmission process, the communication data transmission timer is sequentially decremented by one to obtain the timing for transmitting the communication data.

  After the process of step S1055, the main CPU 2093 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area (step S1056). In this case, in the communication data storage area, command data (for example, initialization command data, medal insertion command data, start command data, reel rotation start) stored in the communication data storage area by the processing in the main control circuit 2091 so far. Command data, reel stop command data, winning action command data, bonus start command data, bonus end command data, input state command data, etc.) or when there is no data to be transmitted, the data is stored in step S1054 described above. Since no-operation command data is stored, some command data is always transmitted.

  After the process of step S1056, the main CPU 2093 updates the communication data storage area (step S1057), and then ends this subroutine.

  As described above, the main CPU 2093 transmits the command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 2101 at every predetermined timing counted by the communication data transmission timer by executing the communication data transmission process. . In the sub control circuit 2101, command analysis processing (see step S <b> 204 in FIG. 26) is executed based on the received command data.

[Demo command transmission process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a demo command transmission process performed in the pachislot main control circuit according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  The demo command transmission process shown in FIG. 63 is performed in an interrupt process (see FIG. 61). For example, after executing the process of step S1032, the demo command transmission process may be executed before executing the process of step S1033.

  In the demo command transmission process, first, the main CPU 2093 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted (step S1071). In this process, the main CPU 2093 is in a state where a medal can be inserted if a predetermined time has elapsed after the medal payout process (see step S1017 in FIG. 60) has been performed until the start switch 2079 is turned on. to decide. If it is determined that the medal insertion is not possible, the main CPU 2093 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the medal can be inserted, the main CPU 2093 determines whether or not the error flag is set to ON (step S1072). The error flag is a flag indicating that some kind of error has occurred (see step S1082). When the power is turned on, the error flag is set to off. Examples of the error include a hopper empty error indicating that the number of medals accommodated in the hopper device 2051 has decreased. In addition, a medal clogging error indicating that a medal is jammed on the medal rail 2210 can be cited. As described above, when it is detected that a medal is jammed in the medal rail 2210, if the main CPU 2093 transmits a signal indicating that to the main control circuit 2091, the main CPU 2093 generates a medal jam error. I can recognize that.

  When determining that the error flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 2093 determines whether or not the demo command transmission flag is set to ON (step S1073). When the power is turned on, the demo command transmission flag is set to OFF. When determining that the demo command transmission flag is not set on, the main CPU 2093 sets an initial value in the demo command transmission timer (step S1074), and sets the demo command transmission flag on (step S1075).

  If it is determined in step S1073 that the demo command transmission flag is set ON, or after executing the process of step S1075, the main CPU 2093 decrements the demo command transmission timer by 1 (step S1076). When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 2021 or when a medal is inserted by pressing the BET button 2022, the subtraction of the demo command transmission timer is canceled and the initial value is again set in the demo command transmission timer. Set.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 determines whether or not the demo command transmission timer is 0 (step S1077). When determining that the demo command transmission timer is not 0, the main CPU 2093 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1072 that the error flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S1077 that the demo command transmission timer is 0, the main CPU 2093 determines an error (for example, a hopper empty error or a medal jam error). Or the like) is generated (step S1078).

  When determining that no error has occurred, the main CPU 2093 generates demo command data and stores the generated demo command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1079). The demo command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101 in communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 62). When the demo command data is received, the sub-control circuit 2101 performs processing related to display of the demo screen (see step S112 in FIG. 20).

  Then, the main CPU 2093 sets the demo command transmission flag to off (step S1080) and sets the error flag to off (step S1081). Thereafter, the main CPU 2093 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1078 that an error has occurred, the main CPU 2093 sets the error flag to ON (step S1082), and then ends this subroutine.

  The processing executed in the main control circuit 2091 of the pachislot 2001 has been described above with reference to FIGS.

  Although not described above, in the pachislot 2001, an AT gaming state may be provided. The AT gaming state is a state in which information for winning a symbol combination (combination) corresponding to the internal winning combination (for example, pressing order (stop button stop order)) is notified. In the AT gaming state, when a predetermined push order (an internal winning combination that defines a combination in which a winning is established by pressing the stop button in an appropriate order) is won internally, the push order corresponding to the push order Is notified, the player can win a combination defined by the pressing order by operating the stop button according to the notified pressing order.

  In the pachislot 2001, a state (high RT gaming state) in which the replay winning probability is relatively high may be provided. Further, there may be provided a state (ART gaming state) in which such a high RT gaming state is set and notification in the AT gaming state is performed. In the high RT game state, since replay is won with high probability, the consumption of game media (medals) can be reduced. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, information (push order) necessary for winning a combination with a large number of payouts of game media (medals) is notified, so that the game media ( Opportunities to increase medals).

  Such an ART gaming state can be configured to be triggered by, for example, winning an ART lottery performed when a predetermined internal winning combination is won internally. Further, the ART gaming state can be configured to end when a predetermined number of unit games are played. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of remaining games (the number of ART games) in the ART gaming state may be increased (added).

  In the above, the example which applied this invention to the pachislot machine was demonstrated. Below, the modification which applied this invention to the roulette apparatus is demonstrated. FIG. 64 is a top view of the roulette device.

  The roulette device 2500 includes a frame body 2501 that is fixed to the housing, and a roulette wheel 2502 that is housed and supported rotatably inside the frame body 2501. A large number (38) of concave number pockets 2503 are formed on the upper surface of the roulette wheel 2502. Further, the numbers “0”, “00”, “1” to “36” are displayed on the upper surface of the roulette wheel 2502 in the outward direction of each number pocket 2503 so as to correspond to each number pocket 2503. A display board 2504 is formed.

  A ball slot 2507 is formed inside the frame body 2501. A ball throwing device (not shown) is connected to the ball throwing port 2507 so that the ball 2505 is thrown from the ball throwing port 2507 onto the roulette wheel 2502 as the ball throwing device is driven.

  A wheel drive motor (not shown) is provided below the roulette wheel 2502, and the roulette wheel 2502 rotates as the wheel drive motor is driven.

  A metal plate (not shown) is attached below the roulette wheel 2502 at a predetermined interval. The proximity sensor detects the metal plate so that the position of the number pocket 2503 can be detected. ing.

  The frame body 2501 is gently inclined inward, and a guide wall 2506 is formed at an intermediate portion thereof. The guide wall 2506 is for rolling the ball 2505 by guiding the thrown ball 2505 against the centrifugal force. When the rotation speed of the ball 2505 decreases and the centrifugal force is lost, the ball 2505 rolls down the slope of the frame body 2501 and goes inward to reach the rotating roulette wheel 2502. Then, the ball 2505 rolling on the roulette wheel 2502 passes on the number display plate 2504 outside the roulette wheel 2502 that is further rotated and is stored in one of the number pockets 2503. As a result, the number described on the number display plate 2504 corresponding to the stored number pocket 2503 is determined by the ball sensor and becomes the winning number.

  Such a roulette device 2500 is photographed by a camera, and the same processing as the camera image analysis processing (see FIG. 31) is performed on the camera image obtained by the photographing. Thereby, the movement of the ball 2505 until it is stored in the number pocket 2503 can be tracked.

  Note that such a roulette device may be provided in a pachislot machine. Specifically, a roulette device is attached to an appropriate position in the pachislot machine (for example, a pedestal portion 2012 (see FIG. 50) of the front door 2002b in the pachislot 2001), and a roulette game is played according to the game situation. Also good. In that case, the number of number pockets may be smaller (for example, about 3 to 6). In such a pachislot machine, for example, based on the result of the roulette game (winning number), it is possible to suggest the presence or absence of bonuses or ARTs, or to determine the number of additional ART games It is. In such a pachislot machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement of the ball by tracking the movement of the ball until it is stored in the number pocket and performing an effect based on the tracking result. Yes, you can improve the fun of the game.

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions where the descriptions in the first embodiment and the second embodiment apply also in the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Game media tracking process>
In the first embodiment, it has been described that the process shown in FIG. 42 is performed as the game medium tracking process (see step S286 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 65 is performed.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a game medium tracking process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the size of the game ball in the ball position image. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the size of the game ball in the ball position image and the width of the search range. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a search range setting table.

  Similar to the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 42, the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 65 is performed between the game ball at time T2 (see FIG. 41 (a)) and the game ball at time T3 (see FIG. 41 (b)). This is a process of associating. As described in the first embodiment, an image indicating the position of the game ball at time T2 is referred to as a ball position image (T2), and an image indicating the position of the game ball at time T3 is referred to as a ball position image (T3). To do. The sphere position image (T2) is an AND image (see FIG. 37) of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), and the sphere position image (T3) is the difference image (2) and the difference image (3). AND image.

  In the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 65, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of steps S1301 to S1303. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S301 to S303 of FIG.

  In step S1303, as in step S303 of FIG. 42, the sub CPU 201 determines the position of each of the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) and one game ball (for example, ID (1)) at time T2. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) by comparing the search range set for the game ball). To do.

  As described in the first embodiment, a plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T2) (a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T2) are associated with the IDs of the game balls, respectively. It has been. A search range is set for each of the plurality of game balls (a plurality of IDs). The search range is an area where a game ball existing at a certain position at time T2 (at a certain time) is likely to exist at time T3 (after a time corresponding to one frame has elapsed) (game at a time corresponding to one frame). The range in which the sphere can move.

  Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), for each game ball included in the ball position image (T2), a search range is set in a region near the position of the game ball. However, the breadth of the search range differs depending on the position of the game ball in the ball position image (T2). Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG.

  At a certain time (time T2), the game ball with ID (1) is in the position shown in FIG. 66 (a) on the game board 12 (game area 12a), and the game ball with ID (2) is in the game board 12 It is assumed that the position is shown in FIG. 66 (b) on (game area 12a). The distance in the vertical direction between the game ball with ID (1) and the CCD camera 1000 is α, and the distance in the vertical direction between the game ball with ID (2) and the CCD camera 1000 is β. The game ball with ID (2) is positioned below the game ball with ID (1), and α <β.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game area 12a is formed as a flat surface, and the game ball is basically restrained by the plane and basically moves only in the two-dimensional direction. . Since the direction of the plane is a vertical direction, the distance in the horizontal direction between the game ball and the CCD camera 1000 is constant (γ). In this embodiment, the distance between the CCD camera 1000 and the game board 12 is quite short (see FIG. 6), and the values of α and β are considerably large (for example, 5 times to 50 times, or 10 times to 30 times). 66 (a) and 66 (b), γ is shown as a somewhat large value for easy understanding.

  FIG. 66C shows a game ball with ID (1) and a game ball with ID (2) in the ball position image (T2). FIG. 66 (c) shows the entire ball position image (T2). Actually, a lot of game balls are included in addition to the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (2). The game balls other than the game ball with ID (1) and the game ball with ID (2) are not shown.

  The ball position image has a rectangular shape. In FIG. 66C, the distance from the upper side of the ball position image (T2) (rectangle) is α ′, ID in the game ball of ID (1). It is β ′ in the game ball of (2). The ratio of α ′ and β ′ is the same as the ratio of α and β (α: β = α ′: β ′), and α ′ <β ′.

  Also, the game ball with ID (1) is located in the ball position image because the game ball with ID (1) is located closer to the CCD camera 1000 than the game ball with ID (2). Is larger than the game ball of ID (2). Specifically, the diameter of the game ball with ID (1) is β / α times the diameter of the game ball with ID (2). In the present embodiment, the size (diameter) of the game ball in the ball position image is inversely proportional to the vertical distance between the game ball and the CCD camera 1000 in the game area 12a.

  FIG. 67 shows a search range set for such a game ball with ID (1) and ID (2). The search range (1) set for the game ball with ID (1) is wider than the search range (2) set for the game ball with ID (2). In this embodiment, the size of the search range set for one game ball is proportional to the area of the game ball in the ball position image.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the X axis is set along the upper side of the ball position image (rectangle), and the Y axis is set along the left side, and the position of the game ball in the ball position image is set to the value of the X axis coordinate and the Y axis. When expressed in terms of coordinates, the search range set for one game ball has a width corresponding to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the game ball. Specifically, the search range is set as an area having a rectangular shape (rectangular area), and the size of the search range set for one game ball (the length in the X axis direction and the Y axis in the rectangular area) The length of the direction) is proportional to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the game ball, regardless of the value of the X-axis coordinate of the game ball. Note that the position of the game ball is represented by the position coordinates of the center of gravity of the game ball, and the center of gravity of the search range coincides with the center of gravity of the game ball.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67, the Y-axis coordinate value of the game ball with ID (1) is α ′, and the Y-axis coordinate value of the game ball with ID (2) is β ′ (FIG. 66 (c)). reference). Thus, when the size of the search range (1) is compared with the size of the search range (2), the search range (1) searches for both the length in the X-axis direction and the length in the Y-axis direction in the rectangular region. This is β ′ / α ′ (= β / α) times the range (2).

  For example, it is assumed that the Y-axis coordinate value of the game ball with ID (1) is 50 (α ′ = 50) and the Y-axis coordinate value of the game ball with ID (2) is 100 (β ′ = 100). The range (1) is assumed to be a square region in which the length in the X-axis direction and the length in the Y-axis direction are each 2. In this case, the search range (2) can be a square region having a length in the X-axis direction and a length in the Y-axis direction of 1 (= 2 × 50/100).

  In step S1303 in FIG. 65, the sub CPU 201 explains one game ball (for example, a game ball with ID (1) or a game ball with ID (2)) at time T2 with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As described above, the search range is set based on the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the game ball. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3).

  When it is determined that there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of steps S1304 to S1306. Since the processing is the same as the processing in steps S304 to S306 in FIG. 42, description thereof is omitted here.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3), the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of steps S1307 and S1308. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S307 and S308 in FIG. 42, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  In step S1307, when it is determined that it is not disappearing in the discharge area, that is, the game ball having the ID currently being processed (for example, ID (1)) is discharged at time T2 (see FIG. 39). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball does not belong to the masking area, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball exists in the masking area (step S1309). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a part of the masking area (see FIG. 38) as a search range, and determines whether or not a game ball exists within the search range.

  As described in the first embodiment, the masking area is excluded from the object of image processing in principle, but here, the search is performed on the masking area. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 has an area within a certain range from the position at the time T2 of the gaming ball of the ID (for example, ID (1)) that is the current processing target among all the masking areas (the gaming ball's By performing image processing such as a difference extraction process between previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31) on the masking region located in the vicinity, it is determined whether or not a game ball exists in the region.

  Here, the masking area is a range set in advance as an area where it is easy to lose sight of the game ball. For example, an area within a predetermined range from the position where the LED is disposed (an area where the LED is particularly lit) may be erroneously detected as a game ball, and is desirably set as a masking area. In order to perform the difference extraction process between the preceding and subsequent frames on such an area, for example, a method (see FIG. 73) described in a fourth embodiment to be described later may be used. The masking area is composed of a large number of rectangular areas. By reducing the area of each rectangular region, it becomes easier to adjust the range of the masking region included in the search range. As a result, only the minimum necessary masking area can be included in the search range, and the processing load can be prevented from increasing due to the excessive masking area being included in the search range. it can.

  If it is determined in step S1309 that a game ball is present in the masking area, the sub CPU 201 notifies the error that the game ball has disappeared outside the ball passage area (step S1310). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball exists in the masking area where the game ball cannot normally exist (for example, the area where the accessory is arranged) (for example, the game ball is centered). An error signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206 as necessary. . As a result, an image notifying that an error has occurred is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or a sound notifying that an error has occurred is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 may transmit an error signal to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). In this case, the sub CPU 201 may release the ID currently being processed. Note that when an area where the lighting of the LED is particularly intense as described above is set as a masking area, an error does not occur when it is determined that a game ball exists in the area, The CPU 201 may not perform the process of step S1310.

  After executing the process of step S1310, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1305. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may terminate this subroutine after performing error notification. Also, if the ID currently being processed is not released in the process of step S1310, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1304, and adds the position information of the game ball determined to exist in the masking area to the relevant information. The ID may be associated (a mark is set).

  If it is determined in step S1309 that there is no game ball in the masking area, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1311 and step S1312, which are the same as the processing of step S309 and step S310 of FIG. Since this is a process, a description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the processing of step S1312, the sub CPU 201 starts adding the disappearance timer. The value of the disappearance timer is the elapsed time since the search process (the process of step S1303) for the ID currently being processed (the time elapsed since the search process was started, the middle of the search process being performed). Time elapsed as a starting point, time elapsed since the end of the search process, etc.).

  In step S1311, when it is determined that the disappearance flag is set to ON in association with the ID currently being processed (for example, ID (1)), or after executing the process of step S1313, the sub CPU 201 Sets the search range for the ID (for example, ID (1)) again according to the value of the disappearance timer (step S1314).

  In the present embodiment, the search range setting table shown in FIG. 68 is stored in the program ROM 202. In the search range setting table, the correspondence between the range of possible values for the disappearance timer and the magnification for the initial search range is defined, and the larger the value of the disappearance timer, the larger the value is set as the magnification for the initial search range. ing. The initial search range is a search range that is set for each ID for the first time when searching for the sphere position image (T3), and is set as described with reference to FIG. In the process of step S1314, the sub CPU 201 refers to the search range setting table stored in the program ROM 202 to obtain a magnification corresponding to the current value of the disappearance timer, and based on the magnification and the initial search range. To calculate a new search range. For example, when the initial search range is a square area having a length in the X-axis direction and a length in the Y-axis direction of 2 as in the search range (1) shown in FIG. 67, the value of the disappearance timer is 100. In some cases, the new search range is a square area having a length in the X-axis direction and a length in the Y-axis direction of 3.2 (= 2 × 1.6). Based on the search range reset as described above, the search process for the ID (the process of step S1303) is performed again. The unit of the length of the search range (the length in the X-axis direction and the length in the Y-axis direction) is not particularly limited, and an arbitrary unit such as cm, mm, or μm can be adopted.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S1315. Since this process is the same as the process of step S312 of FIG. 42, the description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the value of the re-search counter is larger than 50 or whether the value of the disappearance timer is larger than a value corresponding to 200 ms (step S1316).

  If it is determined that the value of the re-search counter is 50 or less and the value of the disappearance timer is less than or equal to 200 ms, the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the previous detection position (step S1317). As described in the first embodiment, “mark” refers to associating position information of a game ball with an ID. In the processing of step S1317, the sub CPU 201 determines the current processing target ID (for example, ID (1)) and the latest position information (ball position image) of the game ball with the ID (for example, ID (1)). (The position information of the game ball included in (T2)) is associated and stored in the work RAM 203 continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the re-search counter is greater than 50 or the value of the disappearance timer is greater than the value corresponding to 200 ms, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has disappeared within the ball passage area. Then, error notification is performed (step S1318). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 transmits an error signal indicating that an error has occurred to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that an error has occurred is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or a sound notifying that an error has occurred is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 may transmit an error signal to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). Although not shown, in the process of step S1318, the sub CPU 201 ends the search for the ID (eg, ID (1)) currently being processed (see step S314 in FIG. 42). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag to ON in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing related to the angle correction of the camera shooting area (step S1319). In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the CCD camera 1000 to adjust the shooting range by changing the direction of the lens. After executing the process of step S1319, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1320. However, the sub CPU 201 may end this subroutine without performing the process of step S1320. Also, the sub CPU 201 may execute the process of step S1318. After executing this step, the present subroutine may be terminated without performing the process of step S1319.

  After executing the process of step S1306, step S1317, or step S1319, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S1320. This process is the same as the process of step S315 of FIG. The description in is omitted. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 performs the search process again (the process of step S1303) or ends this subroutine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix 1>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  However, usually in a pachinko machine, the game ball rolls at a reasonable speed. However, in the conventional technology as described above, as a result of the time required for image analysis, the game ball that changes moment by moment is used. It is assumed that it becomes difficult to continuously track the game ball while grasping the position in real time.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily tracking a game ball.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) a game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, two consecutive frame images are respectively taken as a first frame image (frame image taken at time T2) and a second frame image (time T3). A game ball tracking means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of FIG. 65) for specifying the position in the second frame image for one game ball included in the first frame image. With
The game ball tracking means includes
In the frame image, a coordinate system (coordinate system shown in FIG. 67) defined by the X axis and the Y axis orthogonal to each other is set, and the position of one game ball included in the first frame image is set to (X ₁ , Y ₁ ), on the other hand, when the position of the game ball in the second frame image is (X ₂ , Y ₂ ), a search according to one of the values of X ₁ and Y ₁ (FIG. 65) by performing the processing in step S1303), it is possible to identify both the values of _{X 2} and _{Y 2,}
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in the frame image, a coordinate system (coordinate system shown in FIG. 67) defined by the X axis and the Y axis orthogonal to each other is set, and the first frame image (time The position of one game ball (for example, the game ball with ID (1) or the game ball with ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) included in the frame image captured at T2 is (X ₁ , Y ₁ On the other hand, when the position of the game ball in the second frame image (the frame image taken at time T3) is (X ₂ , Y ₂ ), one of the values of X ₁ and Y ₁ It is possible to specify both values of X ₂ and Y ₂ by performing a search according to. In this way, in the search for tracking the movement of one game ball, it is sufficient to refer to only one of the X-axis coordinate value and the Y-axis coordinate value, thereby reducing the load on the tracking process. And tracking can be facilitated.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1),
One game ball in the frame image has an area corresponding to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the game ball.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, one game ball in the frame image (for example, a game ball with ID (1) or a game ball with ID (2) shown in FIG. 66 (c)) The game ball has an area corresponding to the value of the Y-axis coordinate (for example, α ′ or β ′). That is, one game ball (for example, a game ball with ID (1) or a game ball with ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) included in the first frame image (a frame image taken at time T2) is If the position coordinates of the game ball in the first frame image (the frame image taken at time T2) are (X ₁ , Y ₁ ), it corresponds to the value of Y ₁ (for example, α ′ or β ′) The first frame image (the frame image taken at time T2) is occupied in size. Here, one game ball (for example, a game ball with ID (1) or a game ball with ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) included in the first frame image (the frame image taken at time T2). The larger the area is, the position coordinates (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) of the game ball at the shooting timing (time T2) of the first frame image and the position of the game ball at the shooting timing (time T3) of the second frame image A change in position between the coordinates (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) (moving speed of the game ball in the frame image) is also considered to increase. Therefore, one game ball (for example, a game ball with ID (1) or a game ball with ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) included in the first frame image (the frame image taken at time T2). if so the search range larger the area becomes wider (i.e., by setting the search range corresponding to the value of Y _1), the game balls in the second frame image (captured frame images at time T3) It is assumed that it can be effectively included in the search range. As a result, the efficiency of the search process can be improved, and the load on the tracking process can be greatly reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the X axis and the Y axis are set as shown in FIG. 67. However, the X axis and the Y axis can be set arbitrarily. Whatever coordinate system is set, one game ball in the frame image (for example, a game ball with ID (1) or a game ball with ID (2) shown in FIG. 66 (c)) has an X-axis coordinate. And a value corresponding to only one value (for example, α ′ or β ′), and a search range corresponding to the one value (for example, the search range ( Search can be performed based on 1) or search range (2)). Then, if pattern matching is performed using such a search range, it is possible to simply perform a comparison between two frames and extract a region having a large difference, while reducing the amount of CPU calculation and memory usage. Sphere tracking can be performed.

<Appendix 2>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, there has been known a goto action that attempts to acquire a ball by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, crafted frauds have frequently occurred, and it is desired to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine, the game store is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The present inventor detects abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine by using the technology developed by himself in the process of conducting a intensive study on the technology for tracking the game ball as described above, and prevents illegal acts and I came up with the idea that it could be useful in dealing with a malfunction.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality that has occurred in a gaming machine.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(2-1) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down;
The game balls that have flowed down the game area can enter, and the discharged game balls can be discharged to the outside of the game area (first start port 44, second start port 45, first large size). Winning entrance 53, second major winning entrance 54, out exit 55, etc.)
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, two consecutive frame images are respectively taken as a first frame image (frame image taken at time T2) and a second frame image (time T3). A game ball tracking means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of FIG. 65) for specifying the position in the second frame image for one game ball included in the first frame image. With
The game ball tracking means includes
The second frame image is a range based on the position of one game ball included in the first frame image and does not include a predetermined non-search target region (masking region shown in FIG. 38). Search execution means (sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S1302 and step S1303 in FIG. 65) for executing a search within the search range set as
As a result of the search by the search execution means, the game ball determined to be within the search range in the second frame image is the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image. Game ball identification means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S1304 in FIG. 65) to determine,
As a result of the search by the search execution means, there is a game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image within the search range in the second frame image. In the case where the game ball does not exist in the non-search target area and the one game ball included in the first frame image does not enter the discharge area, the game ball tracking means An error signal transmission means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S1318 in FIG. 65) that transmits an error signal indicating that the tracking of the game ball has failed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the position of one game ball (for example, a game ball with ID (1)) included in the first frame image (the frame image taken at time T2) is used as a reference. The search is executed for a search range set as a range that does not include a predetermined non-search target region (masking region). As a result of the search, a game ball determined to be within the search range in the second frame image (frame image shot at time T3) is displayed as the first frame image (frame image shot at time T2). It is determined that the game ball is the same as the included one game ball (for example, the game ball with ID (1)). On the other hand, as a result of the search, it is determined that the game ball is the same as the one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (the frame image shot at time T2). The first game frame is a case where the power game ball does not exist in the search range in the second frame image (frame image taken at time T3) and does not exist in the non-search target region (masking region). The one game ball (for example, the game ball with ID (1)) included in the image (the frame image taken at time T2) is a discharge area (first start port 44, second start port 45, first large size). When the player has not entered the winning opening 53, the second big winning opening 54, the out opening 55, etc.), an error signal indicating that the tracking of the game ball has failed is transmitted.

  The game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (the frame image taken at time T2) is the second game ball. If the frame image (the frame image taken at time T3) does not exist within the search range (when the target game ball cannot be found within the search range), some abnormality has occurred, There is a possibility that an illegal act has been carried out or a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in such a case, by transmitting an error signal, it is possible to prevent an illegal act or provide an opportunity to deal with a malfunction of the gaming machine. it can. Note that the target game ball has entered the discharge area (the first start port 44, the second start port 45, the first major winning port 53, the second major winning port 54, the out port 55, etc.). When the game ball cannot be found within the search range, an error signal is not transmitted because an abnormality has not occurred. In addition, the non-search target area (masking area) (the area set as an area where the game ball is easily lost) is excluded from the search area in advance, but the game ball is moving normally, but such a loss is lost. An error signal is not transmitted even when the game ball cannot be found by chance due to being located in an easy area. Thereby, it can be prevented that the abnormality is erroneously detected although no abnormality has occurred.

  In the present specification, “discharge area” and “discharge area” (see FIG. 39) are different concepts. “Discharge area” is a portion (discharge port) having a structure that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and a passage for discharging the entered game ball to the outside of the game area It is comprised from the part currently formed. The “discharge area” is defined by a structure capable of entering and discharging such a game ball. In contrast, the “discharge area” is an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of one discharge area, as described with reference to FIG. The “discharge area” is set so that the entire area is included in the shooting range of the shooting device (camera). For example, when a game ball included in the shooting range at one time has passed a time corresponding to one frame (for example, 4 ms) from the one time, the shooting range is obtained by entering the discharge area. In such a situation that the game ball is not included, the range in which the game ball can exist at the one time is set as the predetermined range. That is, the predetermined range includes a portion included in the shooting range of the camera in the vicinity of the discharge area and a distance that the game ball can move in the vicinity of the discharge area while a time corresponding to one frame elapses. Set in consideration. The distance that the game ball can move in the vicinity of the discharge area while the time corresponding to one frame elapses varies depending on the structure of the game machine (game board), but can be obtained by conducting an experiment. On the other hand, the “discharge area” is defined by the structure as described above, and is irrelevant to the shooting range of the camera. It may be. When a part of the discharge area is included in the photographing range, the part is a part of the discharge area and a part of the discharge area. That is, the discharge area and the discharge area may partially overlap each other. Further, when the game ball that has entered the discharge area stays within the shooting range of the camera for a relatively long time (for example, a time corresponding to one frame or more) (a wide range of the discharge area is included in the shooting range of the camera). In such a case, the entire discharge area may be included in the discharge area. As described above, the “discharge area” is an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of one discharge area, but the “neighbor” may include the discharge area itself, and the “discharge area” It may be set so that a part or all of them are included in the “discharge area”.

(2-2) The gaming machine of (2-1),
The search execution means includes
A range different from the search range when a game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image does not exist within the search range in the second frame image As a new search range (search range reset in step S1314 in FIG. 65), the search for the second frame image can be repeatedly executed.
The error signal transmission means includes
When the number of repetitions of the search reaches a predetermined number, the error signal is transmitted.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, an error signal is transmitted when the number of search repetitions reaches a predetermined number. The fact that the number of repetitions of the search has reached the predetermined number means that the target game ball could not be found even though the search was repeated a predetermined number of times, It is assumed that there is a high probability that According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, an abnormality can be accurately detected by transmitting an error signal in such a case.

<Appendix 3>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  However, in the conventional techniques as described above, a specific method for detecting the position of a game ball that changes every moment and a processing time for image analysis are not considered, and the game ball is tracked in real time. It is assumed that it will be difficult to do.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of tracking a game ball with high accuracy.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) a game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, two consecutive frame images are respectively taken as a first frame image (frame image taken at time T2) and a second frame image (time T3). A game ball tracking means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of FIG. 65) for specifying the position in the second frame image for one game ball included in the first frame image. With
The game ball tracking means includes
First-time search execution means for executing a search for the second frame image with respect to a predetermined range based on the position of the one game ball included in the first frame image (the processing in steps S1302 and S1303 in FIG. 65) Sub CPU 201) that executes
As a result of the search by the first search execution means, the game ball determined to be within the predetermined range in the second frame image is the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image. Initial tracking means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S1304 in FIG. 65),
As a result of the search by the initial search execution means, a game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image exists within the predetermined range in the second frame image If not, continuous search execution means for executing a search for an extension range wider than the predetermined range for the second frame image (the sub CPU 201 executing the processing of step S1314, step S1302, and step S1303 in FIG. 65). )When,
As a result of the search by the continuous search execution means, the game ball determined to exist within the extended range in the second frame image is the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image. Continuous tracking means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S1304 in FIG. 65).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, in the first search, one game ball (for example, a game ball with ID (1)) included in the first frame image (frame image taken at time T2). A search is performed for the second frame image (the frame image taken at time T3) for a predetermined range based on the position of. As a result of the initial search, it is determined that the game ball is the same as the one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (the frame image shot at time T2). When the game ball to be played does not exist within the predetermined range in the second frame image (the frame image shot at time T3), the continuous search is executed for an extended range wider than the predetermined range. As a result, the predetermined range subject to the initial search is set to a limited range to a certain extent, and only when the target game ball cannot be found in the search range in the initial search, Search can be performed. In this regard, if the initial search is performed in a wide range, it becomes easy to find the target game ball, but as a result of increasing the processing load for the initial search, it becomes difficult to track the game ball. turn into. On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the first search, and it is possible to track the game ball with high accuracy.

(3-2) The gaming machine of (3-1),
The continuous search execution means includes
As a result of the search for the extended range in the second frame image, a game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image is within the extended range. If it does not exist, it is possible to repeatedly execute a search for a range wider than the extended range for the second frame image,
As a time elapses as the number of repetitions of the search increases, a wide range is set as the extended range.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the search range can be expanded at any time according to the elapsed time as the number of repetitions of the continuous search increases. As a result, the efficiency of the search process can be improved, and the load on the tracking process can be further reduced.

  If the search range is expanded indefinitely, production LEDs and masking regions are included in the search range in large quantities, increasing the processing burden. Therefore, stop expanding the search range up to a certain extent. It is desirable to end the tracking of the game ball. The upper limit of such an area is determined by various factors such as the calculation speed of the CPU and the physical structure of the gaming machine (game board). For example, if the search range is expanded to a certain extent, it is assumed that the working memory capacity required for executing the search process will be exceeded, so the width of the search range depends on the memory capacity. It is conceivable to set an upper limit for. Further, when the area of the masking region existing in the search range becomes equal to or larger than a predetermined value, it is possible that the processing load exceeds a certain limit and the search range is not further expanded. If an upper limit is set for the number of search repetitions as in this embodiment, it is possible to define the upper limit of the width of the search range, thereby preventing the search range from expanding without limit. Can do. However, the search range may be extended to the entire shooting range by the CCD camera 1000 as long as a game ball is not found without setting an upper limit on the width of the search range. Alternatively, when a scene around the gaming machine is included in the shooting range by the CCD camera 1000, the area corresponding to the gaming machine is identified from the image obtained by shooting without expanding the search range to the entire shooting range. However, the search range may be extended to the entire area corresponding to the gaming machine (the surrounding scenery is removed). Further, an area corresponding to the game board in the gaming machine may be specified (except for the game board), and the search range may be expanded to the entire area corresponding to the game board.

  Note that the shooting device (camera) according to the present invention is arranged so that a game area can be shot. However, the game area may be entirely included in the shooting range, or only a part of the game area may be shot. It may be included in the range. Further, areas other than the game area may be included in the shooting range. For example, a configuration of a gaming machine other than the game area or a landscape around the gaming machine may be included in the shooting range. When the shooting range includes a configuration of a gaming machine other than the gaming area, all of the gaming machines may be included in the shooting range, or only a part of one gaming machine is included in the shooting range. May be.

  The third embodiment has been described above. Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment as well, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, prior to the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 65), in order to detect the position of the game ball, the difference between the previous and next frames is extracted. The process related to (see FIGS. 33 to 37) is performed. However, in the third embodiment, the method for detecting the position of the game ball is not limited to the method described in the first embodiment, and the difference processing is simply performed on each frame image and the background image. An executing method (background difference method) may be employed. As the background image, an LED unlit background image obtained by shooting the game board 12 in a state where no game ball exists in the game area 12a and in which the effect LED is not lit can be used. In this case, the background image to be used may be appropriately selected according to the state of the effect LED at the shooting timing of each frame image. That is, the effect LED (LED 59) is controlled by the LED control circuit 207 based on the lamp request (message) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) to the LED control circuit 207 (step in FIG. 26). The sub CPU 201 can recognize the state of the effect LED based on the designation information (effect information) of the effect content included in the lamp request. Thereby, when the effect LED is turned off at the shooting timing of the frame image, the LED unlit background image is selected, and when the effect LED is lit, the LED lit background image (game is displayed in the game area 12a). It is also possible to select an image obtained by shooting the game board 12 in a state where no sphere is present and the effect LED is lit. In addition, when there is no change in the state of the effect LED between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3), the background difference method is used. In the first embodiment, only when there is a change in the state of the effect LED between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3). As described, comparison between three frames may be performed. However, in order to effectively eliminate the influence on the image caused by the environmental change in the game board 12 including the influence of the external light or the like, it is desirable to always compare between three frames. The above points are applicable not only to the third embodiment but also to other embodiments.

<Modification>
In the third embodiment, in the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 65), the game ball at time T2 (see FIG. 41 (a)) is associated with the game ball at time T3 (see FIG. 41 (b)). Described as a process. In contrast, in the modification shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, a case will be described in which the game ball at time _{TN and} the game ball at time _{TN + 1} are associated with each other more generally.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the processing interval of the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 65) is the same as the frame image acquisition interval has been described. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, a case where the processing interval of the game medium tracking process is shorter than the frame image acquisition interval will be described.

<Game media tracking process (variation)>
69A and 69B are flowcharts showing a game medium tracking process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 70 and 71 are diagrams illustrating an example of a case where the search range is extended.

The game medium tracking process shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B is a process of associating the game ball at time _{TN with} the game ball at time _{TN + 1} , and is performed at time _{TN + 2} . An image indicating the position of the game ball at time T _N is referred to as a ball position image (T _N ), and an image indicating the position of the game ball at time T _{N + 1} is referred to as a ball position image (T _{N + 1} ).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines one ID (for example, ID (1)) of all IDs currently being managed as a processing target, and the game ball at time _TN for the one ID. It is determined whether or not the tracking is completed (step S1401). “Tracking of a game ball at a time _TN for one ID” means that the position of the game ball of the ID at the time _TN is specified (a mark is set). To do. When the tracking of the game ball at the time _TN for one ID is completed, the ID and the position information of the game ball of the ID at the time _TN (multiple included in the ball position image (T _N )) (Position information of any one of the game balls) is stored in association with the work RAM 203 (see step S1404 and step S1413).

With respect to the ID determined as the processing target (for example, ID (1)), the tracking of the game ball at the time _TN is completed (the position at the time _TN is specified for the game ball of the ID). If it is determined, the sub CPU 201 sets a search range based on the position of the game ball at time _TN (step S1402). The search range set here is the initial search range described in the third embodiment (see FIG. 67).

Next, the sub CPU 201 compares the positions of the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) with the search range set in step S1402 and compares the positions of the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ). It is determined whether or not there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the game balls (step S1403).

When determining that there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the detection position (step S1404). . In this process, the sub CPU 201 associates the position information of the game ball determined to belong to the search range with the ID (for example, ID (1)) that is the current processing target in association with the work RAM 203. Remember.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no gaming ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of steps S1405 to S1408. However, since these processes are the same as the processes in steps S1307 to S1310 in FIG. 65, the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the processing of step S1408, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  Note that after executing the process of step S1408, the sub CPU 201 may move the process to step S1423 instead of ending this subroutine. As a result, similarly to FIG. 65, even after the error notification is performed, the tracking processing in this subroutine is continued for the game balls other than the game ball that has caused the error notification ( Step S1424). Further, after executing the process of step S1408, the sub CPU 201 may release the ID of the game ball that has caused the error notification, but the process proceeds to step S1409 without releasing the ID. It is good. As a result, the tracking process is continued in the next and subsequent subroutines for the game ball that has caused the error notification. For example, when the error notification factor has been resolved (the game ball in the masking region is outside the masking region). When returning, etc.), there is a possibility that the game ball can be found within the search range. Further, for example, as described in the first embodiment, the movement of the game ball is visualized in the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the position information of the game ball obtained as a result of the tracking process (see step S1404). If the production is performed, it is possible to create a situation where both the error notification screen and the production screen are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13. Moreover, it is good also as projecting a certain image | video (refer 8th Embodiment) with respect to the game ball and the vicinity of a game ball using projection apparatuses, such as a projector. Thereby, for example, it is possible to project an image onto a game ball existing in the masking area while performing error notification. Alternatively, while notifying the error (separately from the error notification), instead of projecting the video onto the game ball, projecting the video onto the game ball is the content of the error notification (the processing content of step S1408). Also good. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 13 may display an effect screen instead of displaying an error notification screen. In addition, the video for error notification is projected on the game ball that caused the error notification, and the effect video is displayed for game balls other than the game ball that caused the error notification. It may be projected. In that case, the error notification video and the production video may be different. Thereby, a highly versatile gaming machine can be provided.

If it is determined in step S1407 that there is no game ball in the masking area, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has disappeared in the search based on the position of the game ball at the time _TN , and the ID currently being processed. Correspondingly, the addition of the disappearance timer (T _N ) is started (step S1409). The value of the lost timer (T _N), for ID having the current process target, the association processing for the game ball in the game ball and time T _{N + 1} at time T _N from the start of (the subroutine) This corresponds to the elapsed time (elapsed time from time _{TN + 2} ).

Next, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the disappearance count counter in association with the ID currently being processed (step S1410). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 causes the work RAM 203 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the disappearance count counter stored in the work RAM 203 as a new disappearance count counter value. The number of disappearances indicates the number of times that this subroutine is executed for associating the game ball at time _{TN with} the game ball at time _{TN + 1} for the ID currently being processed. This corresponds to the number of times this subroutine has been executed since losing sight of the ball. If a game ball with one ID is lost in this subroutine performed at a certain time (when the determination result in step S1407 is NO), the number of disappearances is the number including the subroutine as in this embodiment. Alternatively, the count of the number of disappearances may be started from the subroutine, and unlike the present embodiment, the count of the number of disappearances may be started from the next subroutine of the subroutine.

In step S1401, the tracking of the game ball at time _TN is not completed for the ID determined as the processing target (for example, ID (1)) (the position at time _TN is specified for the game ball of the ID). If not, the sub CPU 201 sets a search range corresponding to the disappearance timer (T _K ) with reference to the latest ball position that has been tracked for the ID (step S1411). Here, “the latest ball position that has been tracked” is the last specified ball position that has been identified so far (updated as time passes) for the game ball with the ID. (Latest) ball position. The "completed that latest sphere position tracking", as the "position of the game ball at time T _K", defines a variable K that satisfies K <N. In the process of step S1411, the sub CPU201, based on the position at time _{T K} of the game ball ID to be currently processed, it sets the search range. The search range set here is such that the larger the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ) associated with the ID currently being processed (see step S1409 and step S1418) (the elapsed time from time T _{K + 2} ). The longer it is) the wider the range. The method for making the search range wider as the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ) is larger is not particularly limited, and the search range setting table (see FIG. 68) as described in the third embodiment is used. Alternatively, the current search range may be calculated assuming that the magnification with respect to the initial search range is proportional to the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ). Further, instead of the magnification for the initial search range, the search range itself may be associated with the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball belonging to the search range set in step S1411 exists among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{K + 1} ) (step S1412). .

When determining that there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{K + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the detection position (step S1413). . In this process, the sub CPU 201 associates the position information of the game ball determined to belong to the search range with the ID (for example, ID (1)) that is the current processing target in association with the work RAM 203. Remember.

Here, as an example, an example in the case of K = 1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as a premise, in FIG. 70 (a), the position of the game ball at time T ₂ (2 frame of the sphere position), the position of the game balls at time T ₁ (the first frame of the sphere position) as a reference not included in the initial search range in a state in which the game ball is lost in the search on the basis of the position of the game ball (first frame sphere position) at time T ₁ (see step S1409). The first search is performed at time T ₃ (N = 1). Then, in FIG. 70 (b), the position of the game ball at time _{T 1} (1 frame of the sphere position) search range based on the has been extended (see step S1411), the position of the game ball at time _{T 2} (2 The sphere position of the frame) is included in the expanded search range. The extended search is performed at time T ₄ (N = 2). Thus, the position of the game ball at time T ₁ (the first frame of the sphere position), can be associated with the position of the game ball (second frame sphere position) at time T ₂ (step S1413 see ).

After executing the processing of step S1413, the sub CPU 201 clears the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ) associated with the ID currently being processed, and ends the addition of the disappearance timer (T _K ). (Step S1414). The sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of K (step S1415).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not K = N (step S1416). When determining that K = N is not satisfied (that is, K <N), the sub CPU 201 repeats the processes of steps S1411 to S1416. In this case, the sub CPU 201 may return the process to step S1412 and repeat the processes of step S1412 to step S1416. In this case, after executing the process of step S1416, the process of setting the search range (the process of step S1411) is omitted, and the process of step S1411 (the previous step) performed before executing the process of step S1416. The search range set in step S1411) is used.

If it is determined that K = N, the position at the time _TN of the game ball having the ID currently being processed is specified, so the sub CPU 201 determines the position of the game ball at the time _TN . Is set as a reference (step S1417). Here, the sub CPU 201 may set the initial search range as in step S1402, but adopts an extended search range (for example, the latest search range among the search ranges set in step S1411). It is good.

In Figure 71, in FIG. 70 (b), by using an extended search range, the position of the game ball at time T ₁ (the first frame of the sphere position), the position of the game ball at time T ₂ (2 frame after correspondence between eye ball position) it is performed by using the expanded search range, the position of the game balls in time T _2, and (2 frame of the sphere position), the game balls at time T ₃ This shows a state in which association with the position (sphere position in the third frame) is performed. In FIG. 71, the extended search range is set with reference to the position of the game ball at the time T ₂ (the ball position of the second frame), but the position of the game ball at the time T ₁ (the first frame) The search range may be set with reference to the sphere position). If the search range based on the position of the game ball at the time T ₁ (ball position of the first frame) includes the position of the game ball at the time T ₃ (ball position of the third frame), the game at the time T ₁ skip the correspondence between the position of the sphere (1 th frame sphere position) position of the game ball at time T _2, and (2 frame of the sphere position), the position of the game ball at time T ₁ (the first frame it is possible to perform the association between the sphere position) and the position of the game ball at time T ₃ (3 frame of the sphere position).

  In any case, after executing the process of step S1417, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1403. Thereby, the search process for the ID currently being processed proceeds.

In step S1412, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{K + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 determines that the ID is the current processing target. Correspondingly, the addition of the disappearance timer (T _N ) is started (step S1418). Then, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the disappearance count counter in association with the ID currently being processed (step S1419).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the disappearance number counter is larger than a predetermined number (for example, 2) (step S1420). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the value of the disappearance count counter is greater than the predetermined number of times, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1421 and step S1422, which are the same as the processing of step S1318 and step S1319 of FIG. Since this is a process, a description thereof is omitted here. After executing the processing of step S1422, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  When it is determined in step S1420 that the value of the disappearance count counter is equal to or smaller than the predetermined number, or after executing the processing of step S1404, step S1406, or step S1410, the sub CPU 201 determines the ID currently being processed. The search for (for example, ID (1)) is terminated (step S1423). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag to ON in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S1424. Since this process is the same as the process of step S1320 of FIG. 65, the description thereof is omitted here. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 performs the search process again or ends this subroutine.

<Game media tracking process (variation)>
72A and 72B are flowcharts showing a game medium tracking process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

Game media tracking processing shown in FIG. 72A and FIG. 72B is a correspondence between a game ball in the game ball and the time T _N at time T _N-1, or, the game ball in the game ball and time T _{N + 1} at time T _N This is a process of associating, and is a process performed after acquiring the sphere position image (T _N ) and before acquiring the sphere position image (T _{N + 1} ). An image indicating the position of the game ball at time T _N-1 is referred to as a ball position image (T _N-1 ), and an image indicating the position of the game ball at time T _N is referred to as a ball position image (T _N ). An image indicating the position of the game ball at time T _{N + 1} is referred to as a ball position image (T _{N + 1} ).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sphere position at the time T _{N + 1} is specified (step S1501). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) has been obtained by the difference extraction process between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31). In the present modification, the processing interval of the game medium tracking process is shorter than the frame image acquisition interval, so that the game is performed after the ball position image (T _N ) is generated and before the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) is generated. The medium tracking process is performed a plurality of times (for example, four times). For example, it is assumed that the processing interval of the game medium tracking process (the processing interval of the sub control circuit main process shown in FIG. 26) is 1/4 of the frame image acquisition interval. In this case, every time the sub-control circuit main process (see FIG. 26) is performed four times, the latest ball position image is created in the difference extraction process between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31). For example, it is assumed that a sphere position image (T _N ) is created in the sub-frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31) in the sub-control circuit main process (see FIG. 26) performed at time T _{N + 1} . Then, in step S1501 of the game medium tracking process (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) in the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 26), it is determined as YES because the ball position at time _TN is specified. become. In the next and subsequent three sub-control circuit main processes (see FIG. 26), a new ball position image is not created in the preceding and following frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31). Accordingly, NO is determined in step S1501 of the game medium tracking process (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) during the three sub-control circuit main processes (see FIG. 26). Further, in the next sub-control circuit difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31) in the next sub-control circuit main process (see FIG. 26) (performed at time T _{N + 2} ), a spherical position image (T _{N + 1} ) is created. Is done. Therefore, in step S1501 of the game medium tracking process (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) in the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 26), it is determined YES because the ball position at time _{TN + 1} is specified. become. As described above, when the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 72A and FIG. 72B is executed four times (with the sub control circuit main process shown in FIG. 26 being executed four times, step S1501 in FIG. 72A and FIG. 72B). When the process is executed four times), the determination result of the process of step S1501 is YES only once and the remaining three times are NO.

If it is determined that the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) has been obtained, the sub CPU 201 associates with any ID among all IDs currently being managed and whether the disappearance flag is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S1502). The disappearance flag is set when the game ball disappears in the search based on the position of the game ball at time T _N-1 (see step S1507) when the processing according to this subroutine is performed at time T _{N + 1} . (See step S1511) and is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of one game ball.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the disappearance flag is set to ON in association with any ID of all IDs currently managed, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the disappearance timer corresponding to all IDs. And the addition of the disappearance timer is ended (step S1503). Then, the sub CPU 201 sets the disappearance flag corresponding to all IDs to OFF (step S1504). Note that the value of the disappearance timer is the elapsed time from the start of the process (this subroutine) for associating the game ball at time _{TN-1 with} the game ball at time _TN (the elapsed time from time _{TN + 1).} ) (See step S1512).

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the disappearance flags corresponding to all IDs currently being managed are set to OFF, or after executing the process of step S1504, the sub CPU 201 executes steps S1505 to S1505. Although the processing of S1510 is executed, these processing are the same as the processing of Step S1401 to Step S1406 of FIG. 67A, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S1509 that there is no disappearance in the discharge area, the sub CPU 201 sets the disappearance flag to ON in association with the ID currently being processed (step S1511). Then, the sub CPU 201 starts adding the disappearance timer in association with the ID that is the current processing target (step S1512).

In step S1505, the tracking of the game ball at the time _TN is not completed for the ID determined to be processed (for example, ID (1)) (the position at the time _TN is specified for the game ball of the ID). If it is determined that the sub-CPU 201 determines that the sphere position image (the sphere position image (T _N-1 ), the sphere position image (T _N ), the sphere position image (T _{N + 1} ), etc.) for a plurality of consecutive frames is determined. Considering the size, disappearance, overlap, etc. of each game ball, the position at time _TN is specified for the game ball with the ID (step S1513). As described with reference to FIG. 66, in the present embodiment, the size of each game ball included in the ball position image differs according to the distance from the CCD camera 1000. Depending on the positional relationship between the game balls and the positional relationship between the game ball and the CCD camera 1000, the game balls may overlap on the ball position image (see FIG. 44B). Furthermore, when one game ball and another game ball are completely overlapped, one game ball may disappear on the ball position image. Based on the information regarding the size of the game balls in the ball position image and the overlap of the game balls, the sub CPU 201 selects the ID of the ID currently being processed from among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _N ). The ID is assigned to a game ball having a high probability of being a game ball (see step S287 in FIG. 31).

If it is determined in step S1501 that the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) has not been obtained, the sub CPU 201 associates it with any ID of all IDs that are currently managed, It is determined whether or not (see S1511) is set to ON (step S1516). When determining that the disappearance flags corresponding to all IDs currently being managed are set to OFF, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the disappearance flag is set to ON in association with any ID of all IDs currently managed, the sub CPU 201 sets the disappearance flag to ON. One ID (for example, ID (1)) of all the existing IDs is determined as a processing target, and according to the disappearance timer on the basis of the position of the game ball of the one ID at time T _N-1 A search range is set (step S1517). The search range set here becomes wider as the value of the disappearance timer (see step S1512) is larger (the longer the elapsed time from time _{TN + 1} ) (see FIG. 68).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a game ball belonging to the search range set in step S1517 among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _N ) (step S1518). .

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1519 and step S1520. Since these processing are the same as the processing of step S1413 and step S1414 in FIG. 69B, the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S1520, the sub CPU 201 sets the disappearance flag associated with the ID currently being processed to OFF (step S1521).

In step S1518, when it is determined that there is no game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _N ), or after executing the process of step S1521, the sub CPU 201 Determines whether or not the processing of step S1517 to step S1521 has been completed for all IDs for which the disappearance flag is set to ON (step S1522).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the process from step S1517 to step S1521 has not been completed for any ID among all IDs for which the disappearance flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 executes step S1517 to step S15 for the ID. The process of S1521 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing in steps S1517 to S1521 has been completed for all IDs for which the disappearance flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Below, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component same as the component of the pachinko game machine 1 which concerns on 1st Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment. In addition, the description of the portions in the first embodiment to the third embodiment that are applicable in the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Extraction of difference between previous and next frames>
In the first embodiment, regarding the difference extraction between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31), as shown in FIG. The case where the LED is turned on and the state where the effect LED is turned on continues until time T4. About the case where the state of production LED changes in such a mode, the explanation in the first embodiment is valid also in the fourth embodiment. Below, the case where the state of effect LED changes in another aspect is demonstrated.

  Hereinafter, description will be made on the assumption of the situation shown in FIG. That is, as in the first embodiment, in a state where a plurality of game balls rolls in the game area 12a, attention is paid to one game ball, and the position of the game ball at time T1 is shown as the game ball 120a. The position of the game ball at time T2 is shown as a game ball 120b, and the position of the game ball at time T3 is shown as a game ball 120c (see FIG. 34). In addition, LED59 (effect LED) is provided in the vicinity of the game ball 120a, the game ball 120b, and the game ball 120c.

  FIG. 73 is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between previous and next frames. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a process of obtaining an AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a process of extracting a game ball at time T2 from the AND image and the effect LED single image obtained in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 73, it is assumed that the effect LED is turned off at time T1, the effect LED is turned on between time T1 and time T2, and the effect LED is turned off between time T2 and time T3. .

  In the difference extraction between the previous and next frames in this case, first, difference processing is executed on the frame image (first frame image) captured at time T1 and the frame image (second frame image) captured at time T2. Thus, an image (difference image (1)) corresponding to the difference between the first frame image and the second frame image is created. The method of creating the difference image (1) is as described with reference to FIG. Similarly to FIG. 35, the difference image (1) includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120a) at time T1, the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2, and the LED 59 (effect LED).

  Next, a difference process is executed on the frame image captured at time T2 (second frame image) and the frame image captured at time T3 (third frame image), thereby performing the second frame image. And an image (difference image (2)) corresponding to the difference between the image and the third frame image. The method for creating the difference image (2) is as described with reference to FIG. The difference image (2) obtained here includes positional information of the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2, the game ball (game ball 120c) at time T3, and the LED 59 (effect LED). Because the state at time T3 is different between FIG. 33 and FIG. 73, the position information of the LED 59 (effect LED) is added to the difference image (2) shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74, a process (AND process) for calculating a logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is performed. Thereby, the common part of difference image (1) and difference image (2) is extracted. In FIG. 37, only the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2 is included in the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). In FIG. The AND image with the image (2) includes an LED 59 (effect LED) in addition to the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2. Thus, since the LEDs 59 (effect LEDs) are mixed, the position of the game ball at the time T2 cannot be detected in the AND image.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 75, difference processing is executed on the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and the effect LED single image, and the AND image and the effect LED single image An image corresponding to the difference is created. Thereby, the difference between the AND image and the effect LED single image is extracted, and the image obtained in this way indicates the position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2.

  Here, the effect LED single image is a threshold process for an image obtained by shooting the game board 12 in a state where the game ball does not exist in the game area 12a and the effect LED is lit. It is the binary image which gave. By binarization, the pixel value above the threshold is converted to 1 (white pixel), and the pixel value below the threshold is converted to 0 (black pixel) (or vice versa), so that the area corresponding to the effect LED Only can be extracted. It should be noted that when performing shooting for obtaining an effect LED single image so that only the pixel value of the region corresponding to the effect LED is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the effect LED may be lit at the maximum luminance. Thereby, the difference between the pixel value of the region corresponding to the effect LED and the pixel value of the other region becomes large, and it becomes easy to extract only the region (light spot) corresponding to the effect LED. Alternatively, when the game board 12 is photographed in a state where there is no game ball in the game area 12a and the effect LED is lit, and when no game ball exists in the game area 12a and the effect LED is not lit. The effect LED single image can also be obtained by taking the difference between the images obtained when the game board 12 is photographed in the state. Thus, at the time of shooting (during reception, storage, etc.), an image including structures other than the effect LED among the structures existing on the game board is obtained, and a structure other than the effect LED is obtained from the image. The removed image can be used as an effect LED single image. Further, the effect LED single image is not limited to an image including only the effect LED, and a structure other than the effect LED may be included as long as the effect LED is present. For example, in addition to the effect LED, when the image including the structure existing in the masking area is used as the effect LED single image, and the difference from the AND image shown in FIG. Can be removed from the image. Data corresponding to such an effect LED single image is stored in the program ROM 202.

  As described above, by using the effect LED single image, even when the effect LED state changes in the mode shown in FIG. The position of the game ball at can be detected.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix 4>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  By the way, in order to track a game ball that rolls while changing its position every moment, the premise is that the presence position of the game ball is grasped with high accuracy in each frame image constituting the moving image obtained by shooting. It is necessary to. However, the conventional technology as described above has a problem in that sufficient studies have not been made on this point.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the existence position of a game ball in a frame image with high accuracy in tracking the game ball. Objective.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(4-1) A game board (game board 12) provided with a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move and an illumination means (effect LED);
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to photograph the game board;
Single lighting means for storing an image (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 75) obtained by photographing the game board in a state where no game ball exists in the game area and the lighting means is lit. Image storage means (program ROM 202);
As a moving image obtained by shooting the game board, frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, three consecutive frame images are respectively taken as a first frame image (frame image taken at time T1) and a second frame image (taken at time T2). Frame image) and a third frame image (a frame image taken at time T3), and a first difference image corresponding to a difference between the first frame image and the second frame image (FIG. First difference means for creating a difference image (1)) shown in FIG.
Second difference means for creating a second difference image (difference image (2) shown in FIG. 36) corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the third frame image;
The position of the game ball included in the second frame image is identified by taking the logical product of the first difference image created by the first difference means and the second difference image created by the second difference means. A position specifying means for performing,
The position specifying means includes
When the second frame image includes the illuminating unit in the lit state, and the first frame image and the third frame image include the illuminating unit in the unlit state, or the second frame image is unlit. When the lighting means in the state is included, and the lighting means in the lighting state is included in the first frame image and the third frame image, the first difference image created by the first difference means and An AND image (AND image shown in FIG. 74) obtained by taking a logical product with the second difference image created by the second difference means, and an image (FIG. 74) stored in the illumination means single image storage means. The position of the game ball included in the second frame image is identified by creating an image corresponding to the difference from the effect LED single image shown in FIG.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, it corresponds to the difference between the first frame image (frame image taken at time T1) and the second frame image (frame image taken at time T2). The first difference image (difference image (1)) and the difference between the second frame image (frame image taken at time T2) and the third frame image (frame image taken at time T3). A corresponding second difference image (difference image (2)) is created. Here, in addition to the change in the position of the game ball, an environmental change in the game board 12 occurred between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the second frame image (time T2). In this case, the environmental change appears in the first difference image (difference image (1)). Similarly, in addition to the change in the position of the game ball, an environmental change in the game board 12 occurs between the shooting timing of the second frame image (time T2) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3). In this case, the environment change appears in the second difference image (difference image (2)). However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the appearance of such an environmental change in the difference image is the first difference image (difference image (1)) and the second difference image (difference image (2). )) And can be eliminated. Thereby, even when such an environmental change occurs, the position of the game ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence on the image due to the environmental change.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, there are cases where each frame image includes illumination means (production LED) in the state (i) or (ii) below.
(I) First frame image: off state, second frame image: on state, third frame image: off state (ii) first frame image: on state, second frame image: off state, 3rd frame image: Lighting state

  That is, in the cases (i) and (ii) above, the first difference image (difference image (1)) and the second difference image (difference image (2)) are changed to the state change of the illumination means (effect LED). Since the resulting difference is included, the AND means obtained by ANDing the first difference image (difference image (1)) and the second difference image (difference image (2)) also has illumination means (effect LED). ) Will remain. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, in this case, the AND image and the illumination means single image (effect LED single image) (the game area 12a has no game ball and the illumination means Since the image corresponding to the difference from the image obtained by shooting the game board 12 with the (effect LED) turned on is created, the illumination means (effect LED) can be removed from the image. It is. Thereby, even if the state of the illumination means (effect LED) changes in the above-described mode (i) or (ii), the position of the game ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence. it can.

  Note that the case where the state of the effect LED changes in the mode (i) is as described with reference to FIGS. The same explanation is valid when the state of the effect LED changes in the form (ii).

Furthermore, the same description is valid when the state of the effect LED changes in the following mode (a) or (b).
(A) First frame image: unlit state, second frame image: lit state, third frame image: lit state (the luminance of the effect LED at time T2 is different from the luminance of the effect LED at time T3)
(B) First frame image: lit state, second frame image: lit state, third frame image: unlit state (the luminance of the effect LED at time T1 is different from the luminance of the effect LED at time T2)

  As (a), for example, at time T2 (second frame image capturing timing), the effect LED was lit at the maximum brightness, but at time T3 (third frame image capturing timing), In the case where the brightness of the effect LED has decreased, or conversely, at the time T2 (the shooting timing of the image of the second frame), the effect LED was lit at a brightness lower than the maximum brightness, and the time T3 In (shooting timing of the image of the third frame), a case where the effect LED is lit with the maximum luminance is exemplified. Similarly, as (b) above, for example, at time T1 (shooting timing of the image of the first frame), when the effect LED is lit at a luminance lower than the maximum luminance, time T2 (second frame) In the case of the shooting timing of the image), the effect LED is lit at the maximum brightness at the time T1 (the shooting timing of the image of the first frame). However, at time T2 (timing for capturing an image of the second frame), there may be a case where the brightness of the effect LED has decreased.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, even when the brightness changes while the effect LED is lit, the influence is eliminated. Meanwhile, the position of the game ball can be grasped with high accuracy. At that time, the pixel value of the area corresponding to the effect LED in the image and the pixel of the area corresponding to the game ball are based on the ratio of the brightness of the effect LED to the maximum brightness at each time. A region corresponding to the game ball may be extracted by performing binarization processing or the like on the value.

  Note that whether or not to execute the difference processing (see FIG. 75) on the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and the effect LED single image (see FIG. 75) depends on the shooting timing (time of the first frame image) T1) The state of the effect LED at the shooting timing (time T2) of the image of the second frame and the shooting timing (time T3) of the image of the third frame (turned off or lit, and the luminance when lit) ). Specifically, the effect LED (LED 59) is controlled by the LED control circuit 207 based on a lamp request (message) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) to the LED control circuit 207 (FIG. 26). ), The sub CPU 201 can recognize the state of the effect LED based on the designation information (effect information) of the effect content included in the lamp request. A mode in which an effect LED is included in the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) based on the effect information (for example, the above (i), (ii), (a), (b) In such a manner, it is determined whether or not the state of the effect LED has changed. When it is determined that the state of the effect LED has changed in such a manner, the difference image (1) and the difference image ( The difference processing (see FIG. 75) for the AND image with 2) and the effect LED single image may be executed.

  Alternatively, in the difference extraction between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31), the difference processing (see FIG. 75) for the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and the effect LED single image is performed. It is good also as not performing uniformly. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74, even if the effect LED is included in the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), the AND image is converted into the ball position image (T2) ( The processing proceeds as an image showing the position of the game ball at time T2. Then, in the search in the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 42), there occurs a situation in which one effect LED and one game ball existing in the vicinity of the effect LED are both included in one search range. Can do. When such a problem occurs in the game medium tracking process, the difference process (see FIG. 75) is performed on the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and the effect LED single image. Also good.

  The effect LED single image may be stored in advance in a storage device such as the program ROM 202, or may be created at a predetermined timing after the manufacture of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, an effect LED single image may be created when the power is turned on. In that case, the shooting handle is rotated until shooting for obtaining the effect LED single image is completed. Even if it is, you may comprise so that the launch of a game ball may be stopped.

(4-2) a game board (game board 12) provided with a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move and an illumination means (effect LED);
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to photograph the game board;
Single lighting means for storing an image (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 75) obtained by photographing the game board in a state where no game ball exists in the game area and the lighting means is lit. Image storage means (program ROM 202);
As a moving image obtained by shooting the game board, frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, three consecutive frame images are respectively taken as a first frame image (frame image taken at time T1) and a second frame image (taken at time T2). Frame image) and a third frame image (a frame image taken at time T3), based on the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image, Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in the second frame image (sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S284 in FIG. 31),
The position specifying means includes
Of the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image, the state of the illumination unit included in one frame image is different from the state of the illumination unit included in another frame image , By removing the appearance of the state change of the illumination means on the image based on the image stored in the illumination means single image storage means (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 75), it is included in the second frame image. The location of the game ball to be played,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the first frame image (frame image taken at time T1), the second frame image (frame image taken at time T2), and the third frame When the state of the illumination means (effect LED) included in one frame image is different from the state of the illumination means (effect LED) included in another frame image among the images (frame image taken at time T3) , Illumination means single image (effect LED single image) (image obtained by shooting the game board 12 in a state where no game ball exists in the game area 12a and the illumination means (effect LED) is lit) Based on the above, the appearance of the state change of the illumination means (effect LED) in the image is removed. As a result, even if the state of the illumination means (effect LED) changes between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3), The position of the game ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence.

<Extraction of difference between previous and next frames (modified example)>
In the fourth embodiment, by performing difference processing on the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and the effect LED single image, the state change of the effect LED appears in the image. The case of removing has been described. In the present invention, the method for removing the appearance of the state change of the effect LED in the image is not limited to this example. Hereinafter, modified examples will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a conceptual diagram of the difference extraction between the previous and next frames. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a process of obtaining a second frame image other than the effect LED. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a process of obtaining the difference image (1) from the second frame image and the first frame image other than the effect LED. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a process of obtaining a difference image (2) from the second frame image and the third frame image other than the effect LED.

  As shown in FIG. 76, it is assumed that the effect LED is turned off at time T1, the effect LED is turned on between time T1 and time T2, and the effect LED is turned off between time T2 and time T3. . This is the same as FIG.

  First, an image corresponding to the difference between the image of the second frame and the effect LED single image is executed by performing a difference process on the frame image (second frame image) and the effect LED single image captured at time T2. (Image of second frame other than effect LED) is created. It is assumed that the brightness of the effect LED at time T2 is the same (maximum brightness) as the brightness of the effect LED when shooting is performed to obtain an effect LED single image. Thereby, the lighting effect LED is removed from the second frame image.

  Next, a difference process is executed on the frame image (first frame image) taken at time T1 and the second frame image other than the effect LED, so that 2 other than the first frame image and the effect LED. An image (difference image (1)) corresponding to the difference from the frame image is created. The method of creating the difference image (1) is as described with reference to FIG. The difference image (1) obtained here includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120a) at time T1 and the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2.

  Next, by performing a difference process on the second frame image other than the effect LED and the frame image (third frame image) taken at time T3, the second frame image other than the effect LED and 3 An image (difference image (2)) corresponding to the difference from the image of the frame is created. The method for creating the difference image (2) is as described with reference to FIG. The difference image (2) obtained here includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2 and the game ball (game ball 120c) at time T3.

  Next, a process (AND process) of calculating a logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is performed. Thereby, the common part of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is extracted, and the image obtained in this way (the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2)) is obtained at time T2. The position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) is indicated.

  As described above, by using the effect LED single image, it is possible to make the difference image from which the effect LED is removed the target of logical product, and the state of the effect LED has changed in the mode shown in FIG. Even in this case, the position of the game ball at time T2 can be detected while eliminating the effects of turning on and off the effect LED.

<Appendix 5>
In the above, the modification of 4th Embodiment was demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example has the following characteristics.

(5-1) A game board (game board 12) provided with a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move and an illumination means (effect LED);
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to photograph the game board;
Single lighting means for storing an image (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 77) obtained by photographing the game board in a state where no game ball exists in the game area and the lighting means is lit. Image storage means (program ROM 202);
As a moving image obtained by shooting the game board, frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, three consecutive frame images are respectively taken as a first frame image (frame image taken at time T1) and a second frame image (taken at time T2). Difference between the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image when expressed as a third frame image (a frame image taken at time T3). Difference means for executing the process;
By calculating the logical product of the difference images created based on the difference processing by the difference means (the difference image (1) shown in FIG. 78 and the difference image (2) shown in FIG. 79), the second frame image is obtained. A position specifying means for specifying the position of the included game ball,
The difference means is
When any one of the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image (the frame image taken at time T2) includes the lighting unit that is in a lighting state, Difference processing is executed based on the image stored in the lighting unit single image storage unit (the effect LED single image shown in FIG. 77).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example, the first frame image (the frame image photographed at time T1), the second frame image (the frame image photographed at time T2), and the third frame Images (frame images taken at time T3) are sequentially acquired. Here, in the case where an environmental change occurs in the game board 12 in addition to the change in the position of the game ball between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3). The environmental change appears in the frame image. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example, the appearance of such an environmental change is obtained by ANDing the difference images (difference images (1) and (difference image (2))). It is possible to remove it. Thereby, even when such an environmental change occurs, the position of the game ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence on the image due to the environmental change.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the first frame image (frame image taken at time T1), the second frame image (frame image taken at time T2), and the third frame If any of the frame images (the frame image taken at time T3) and the lighting means (effect LED) in the lit state are included in one of the frame images (the second frame image), the lighting means single image Difference processing based on (effect LED single image) (image obtained by shooting game board 12 in a state where no game ball exists in game area 12a and lighting means (effect LED) is lit) Is executed. Thereby, since the illumination means (effect LED) can be removed from the image, it is possible to prevent the illumination means (effect LED) from being erroneously detected as a game ball. As a result, the position of the game ball can be grasped with high accuracy.

(5-2) The gaming machine according to (5-1),
Production control means for controlling the production using the illumination means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of step S208 in FIG. 26),
The lighting means single image storage means is a maximum brightness lighting image obtained by photographing the game board in a state where no game ball exists in the game area and the lighting means is turned on at the maximum brightness ( The effect LED single image shown in FIG. 77 is stored,
The difference means is
Based on the effect information for controlling the effect by the effect control means, any one of the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image (for example, taken at time T2). When it is determined that the illumination means included in the frame image) is lit at a predetermined luminance or higher, a difference image (the effect shown in FIG. 77) corresponding to the difference between the frame image and the maximum luminance lit image. Brightness adjustment means for creating a second frame image other than the LED,
A difference image (difference image (1) shown in FIG. 78 and difference image (2) shown in FIG. 79) corresponding to the difference between the difference image created by the brightness adjusting means and a frame image other than the frame image is created. A logical product target difference image creating means,
The position specifying means includes
Using the difference image created by the logical product target difference image creating means, the position of the game ball included in the second frame image is specified by taking the logical product of the difference images;
It is characterized by that.

  When the illumination means (effect LED) having a certain luminance or more is included in the image, there is a concern that the illumination means (effect LED) is erroneously detected as a game ball. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modified example, the first frame image (the frame image photographed at time T1), the second frame image (the frame image photographed at time T2), and the three frames The illumination means (effect LED) included in any one of the frame images (the second frame image) of the eye image (the frame image taken at time T3) lights up with a predetermined luminance (maximum luminance). If it is determined that the frame image (the image of the second frame) and the maximum brightness lighting image (effect LED single image) (a state where no game ball exists in the game area 12a and lighting means (effect LED) A difference image (image of the second frame other than the effect LED) corresponding to the difference from the image obtained by shooting the game board 12 in a state where the light is lit at the maximum luminance is created. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the brightness | luminance of the illumination means (effect LED) contained in an image, and it can prevent that an illumination means (effect LED) is misdetected as a game ball.

  In the above modification, the brightness of the effect LED at the shooting timing (time T2) of the image of the second frame is the maximum brightness, and the image of the second frame shot at the timing and the maximum brightness lighting image (effect LED single image The case where a difference from) is taken has been described. However, the brightness of the effect LED at the shooting timing (time T2) of the frame image (second frame image) from which the difference from the maximum brightness lighting image (effect LED single image) is taken may not be the maximum brightness. Or higher (for example, a luminance of 50% or more of the maximum luminance). Since the pixel value of the area corresponding to the effect LED included in the difference image is relatively small if the luminance is equal to or higher than the predetermined luminance, the effect LED is removed by performing binarization processing as necessary. Is possible.

  In the above modification, after creating an image corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the effect LED single image (second frame image other than the effect LED), the second frame image other than the effect LED is created. The difference between the first frame image and the third frame image has been described. FIG. 80 shows still another example.

  FIG. 80 is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between previous and next frames. In this example, the state of the effect LED changes in the same manner as in FIG. The method for creating the difference image (1) is the same as in FIG. On the other hand, the method of creating the difference image (2) is different from that shown in FIG. 76, and the difference image (2) is simply the second frame image and the third frame image without using the effect LED single image. It is created by taking the difference of Even in such a method, if the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is taken, the effect LED is removed, and the effect of turning on and off the effect LED is eliminated, and the game ball at time T2 is removed. The position can be detected.

  Although not shown, after creating the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 74), before creating the AND image of them, the difference image (1 ) And the difference image (2) are subjected to difference processing using the effect LED single image, and by taking the logical product thereafter, an image from which the effect LED is removed is obtained as an AND image. be able to. Thus, in this invention, the timing (image which becomes the object of the said difference process) which performs a difference process using an effect LED single image is not specifically limited, Set the image used as the object of the said difference process suitably. Thus, the production LED can be removed.

  Moreover, although the case where the appearance to the image of the state change of effect LED was removed was demonstrated above, if this invention is applied, it is also possible to remove the state change of objects other than effect LED from an image. As such an object, the movable member described in the first embodiment (an object whose appearance is changed with time by performing an operation with reference to a predetermined position on the game board (without changing the position)) is used. Can be mentioned. In such a movable member, for example, a state that allows a game ball to enter the winning opening (starting port) (open state) and a state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball (closed state) (Including an electric tulip-shaped accessory or a wing-like accessory). Such a movable member may be a decorative member that can be driven by a driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. Even when such a drivable decorative member is provided as a movable accessory, the state change of the decorative member can be removed from the image. As an example, a case is assumed in which the appearance of such a movable member changes from first appearance → second appearance → first appearance at the shooting timing of each frame. Even in such a case, the movable member can be removed from the image by executing the difference process using the movable member single image instead of the effect LED single image. The movable member single image shows, for example, a state in which there is no game ball in the game area, and a state in which the game board is photographed with the movable member having the first appearance, and a state in which no game ball exists in the game area. And it can obtain by taking the difference of the image each acquired with the case where a game board is photoed in the state where a movable member has the 2nd appearance. Thereby, the position of the game ball can be accurately grasped while eliminating the influence on the image caused by the change in the appearance of the movable member.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions in the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment that are applicable in the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Clogging / disappearance detection>
In the first embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 47 has been described as the process related to clogging / disappearance detection (see step S288 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 81 is performed.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing processing relating to clogging / disappearance detection executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the ball clogging mark. FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining a region for detecting clogging of balls.

  In the process related to clogging / disappearance detection shown in FIG. 81, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a plurality of disappearances have occurred near the same location (step S1601). Here, “disappearance” indicates that the ID is released (see step S308 in FIG. 42 and step S352 in FIG. 47). In the process of step S1601, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ID has been released a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more within a predetermined time in an area within a predetermined range. The “region within a predetermined range” is a discharge region (see FIG. 39) or a disappearance detection region (see FIG. 48B). Although not shown, as a premise, the same processing (processing for setting a disappearance detection region) as the processing in steps S351 to S355 in FIG. 47 is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that it is impossible to track the game ball, or in the image obtained by shooting (the ball position image created by the difference extraction process between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31)) Is not detected (for example, when an error notification is given due to losing sight of a game ball, for example, see step S1421 in FIG. 69B). It may be included in “disappearance”. Further, although not described in the first embodiment, the vanishing points may be managed by associating IDs as well as the game balls. For example, when it is determined that the game ball with ID (1) has not moved for a certain period of time (stopped at the same position), the stop position is set as an erasure point, and ID (1) is tracked. It is assumed that the target ID is released (see step S351 to step S353 in FIG. 47). In this case, it is assumed that the vanishing point is managed by the ID by associating the vanishing point with ID (1). In such a situation, since ID (1) has already been released from the tracking target, the ID of the game ball newly released to the game area 12a (the game ball that has passed through the injection area shown in FIG. 39) It is assumed that (1) is assigned. Then, the lost point managed by ID (1) and the game ball managed by ID (1) coexist. Therefore, when the vanishing points are managed by the ID in this way, time information is associated. That is, in the above example, when ID (1) is associated with the lost point, time information indicating the time at that time is also associated. After that, when associating ID (1) with a game ball newly released to the game area 12a, time information indicating the time at that time is also associated. Thereby, based on the said time information (ID old and new), the vanishing point managed by the above ID (1) and the game ball managed by ID (1) are clearly distinguished. be able to. In addition, when the vanishing point is managed by one ID, until the vanishing point is released (until it is deleted from the work RAM 203), the ID is assigned to the game ball newly released to the gaming area 12a. It is good also as not assigning.

  When it is determined that the ID has been released a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more within a predetermined time in an area within the predetermined range, the sub CPU 201 determines that the area within the predetermined range is a discharge area (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether or not there is (step S1602).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the area within the predetermined range is not the discharge area, the sub CPU 201 determines that the area is clogged, and adds a clogged mark to the corresponding location (step S1603). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the same process as step S357 in FIG. Further, the sub CPU 201 uses the vanishing point set first (for example, the vanishing point corresponding to the game ball with ID (1)) out of a predetermined number or more vanishing points existing in the vanishing detection area. Then, a ball clogging mark is set (see FIG. 82 (a)). The ball clogging mark is a circle having a predetermined size centered on the vanishing point set first.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), at least a part of all or more predetermined number of disappearance points existing in the disappearance detection region belong to the inside of a circle set as a ball clogging mark. As described in the first embodiment, the disappearance point setting is canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed (see step S353 in FIG. 47), but the ball clogging mark setting is performed after the predetermined time has elapsed. Will not be released. FIG. 82 (b) shows a state in which the setting of the ball clogging mark remains even after the disappearance point setting corresponding to the game ball with ID (1) is cancelled. Information indicating the ball clogging mark set in this way is stored in the work RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), after the setting of the first (oldest) disappearance point (disappearance point corresponding to the game ball of ID (1)) is cancelled, Next, a new disappearance detection area is set based on the old disappearance point (disappearance point corresponding to the game ball with ID (2)), and processing related to ball clogging determination based on the disappearance detection area (FIG. 47). Step S356 and Step S357) are further performed.

  After executing the processing of step S1603, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that an ID has not been released more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time in an area within a predetermined range, or the area in which the ID has been released is a discharge area in step S1602. If it is determined that there is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a ball clogging mark (see FIG. 82) is set (step S1604). When determining that the ball clogging mark has not been set, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball clogging mark is set, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through a straight line and a distance (downward) of the game ball (disappearance point) in the ball clogging mark. (Step S1605). In this process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the position information (see step S304 in FIG. 42) associated with the work RAM 203 for all IDs currently managed, and there is a game ball in the area for detecting clogging of balls. Judge whether to do.

  An example of the area for detecting the clogging of balls is shown in FIG. ID (1) to ID (3) in the figure indicate disappearance points included in a circle (see FIG. 82 (a)) set as a ball clogging mark. A vanishing point included in a circle set as a ball clogging mark is referred to as a ball clogging target vanishing point. In the example of FIG. 83, the area for detecting the clogging of the ball is an area surrounded by each of the clogging target disappearance points, the side A, the side B, and the side C (area indicated by hatching in the drawing). The side A is a side along a tangent at the left end of the ball clogging target disappearance point (in this example, the disappearance point corresponding to ID (2)) located at the left end. The side C is a side along the tangent at the right end of the ball clogging target erasure point (in this example, the erasure point corresponding to ID (3)) located at the right end. Side B is the side where the distance from the center of gravity of the vanishing point (in this example, the vanishing point corresponding to ID (1)) that is the reference of the ball clogging mark is D, and each ball clogging target vanishing Located below the point. The distance D is a predetermined constant value, but the value is not particularly limited, and the disappearance point (for example, the disappearance point corresponding to ID (1)) that is the reference of the clogging mark and the image It may be a distance from the lower end (that is, side B may coincide with the lower side of the image). In other words, the ball clogging elimination detection area is the range of a trajectory drawn when a ball clogging target erasure point located at the left end (for example, a erasure point corresponding to ID (2)) is moved straight downward. , A range of trajectories drawn when moving the ball clogging disappearance point (for example, the disappearance point corresponding to ID (3)) located at the right end straight downward, and a range sandwiched between these trajectories Consists of

  In step S <b> 1605, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball exists in the area based on the ball clogging elimination detection area set in this way. As described with reference to FIG. 66, when the game ball is located in a region on the image with a certain size, the entire game ball belongs to the region for detecting clogging of balls. In addition, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball is present in the area for detecting the clogging. FIG. 83 shows a state in which the game ball with ID (X) is present in the area for detecting clogging.

  When it is determined that a game ball is present in the area for detecting the clogging of balls, the sub CPU 201 determines that the clogging of balls has been eliminated, and deletes the clogging mark at the corresponding location (step S1606). In this process, the sub CPU 201 clears the ball clogging mark set in step S1603.

  If it is determined in step S1605 that there is no game ball in the ball clogging elimination detection area, or after executing the processing of step S1606, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix 6>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  The present inventor has developed a technique for detecting when the movement trajectory of the game ball is abnormal in the process of earnestly examining the technique for tracking the game ball as described above. Detecting such an abnormality is useful for appropriately dealing with the cause of the abnormality.

  And when adopting such an abnormality detection technology, once an abnormality is detected, it is meaningless to track a game ball that draws an abnormal trajectory any more, so the game ball tracking is temporarily suspended It is possible to do. However, if the tracking of the game ball is not resumed even though the abnormality has been resolved and the movement trajectory of the game ball has become normal, the tracking accuracy will decrease.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of tracking a game ball with high accuracy.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(6-1) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 executing the processing of step S284 and step S286 in FIG. 31);
A stopping phenomenon recognition means for recognizing that a stopping phenomenon in which one gaming ball stays at the same position has occurred when the position of one gaming ball has not changed over a predetermined number of consecutive frame images (FIG. 47). Sub CPU201) which executes the processing of steps S351 to S353 of FIG.
When it is recognized that the stationary phenomenon has occurred for one gaming ball by the stationary phenomenon recognizing means, the disappearance detection shown in FIG. 48B is based on a predetermined range based on the position of the one gaming ball in the frame image. In the above-mentioned range, when N (n is an integer) or more game balls other than the one game ball are recognized by the stop phenomenon recognition means as having occurred, A clogging phenomenon recognizing means for recognizing that a clogging phenomenon in which the stationary phenomenon is repeated (sub CPU 201 executing the processes of steps S354 to S357 in FIG. 47);
After the clogging phenomenon recognizing means recognizes that the clogging phenomenon has occurred, the position of the gaming ball specified by the position specifying means may be a gaming ball in a state where the clogging phenomenon has occurred. When it is determined as belonging to a clogging elimination determination area (for example, a clogging elimination detection area shown in FIG. 83) set as a difficult or impossible area according to the position where the clogging phenomenon occurs, A clogging elimination recognizing means for recognizing that the clogging phenomenon has been eliminated (sub CPU 201 executing the processes of steps S1605 and S1606 in FIG. 81);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the case where clogging (ball clogging) occurs due to the stacking of game balls, it is necessary for the gaming store to appropriately deal with the cause of such clogging (abnormality). Here, when such clogging (ball clogging) has occurred, it is considered that a stopping phenomenon in which one game ball stays at the same position has occurred. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, when the position of one game ball has not changed over a predetermined number of consecutive frame images, a stationary phenomenon occurs with respect to the one game ball. ("Disappearance") is recognized as occurring. A stationary phenomenon is also caused for N (for example, two) or more game balls other than the one game ball within a predetermined range (disappearance detection region) based on the position of the one game ball in the frame image. When it is recognized that (“disappearance”) has occurred, it is recognized that a clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred. Thereby, it is possible to detect that clogging (ball clogging) has occurred due to the stacking of game balls, and an opportunity to eliminate the problem caused by clogging (ball clogging) can be obtained.

  In particular, in pachinko games, a clogging phenomenon called “grape” is known. “Grape” is generated when a plurality of game balls are sandwiched and stacked between nails, and is thus called a bunch of grapes. A “grape” may occur naturally during a game, but a malicious player may intentionally create a “grape” by using a magnet. Regarding the latter, it is known as an illegal act (so-called “grape goto”) that uses a “grape” to guide a game ball to a starting area or the like to acquire a ball. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to detect that such “grape” has occurred, and to prevent “grape goto” from being performed in advance. it can.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, after it is recognized that the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred, the position of the gaming ball is in a state in which the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred. If it is determined that the game ball belongs to the clogging elimination determination area (the area where ball clogging elimination is detected) that is set as an area where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to exist, the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has been resolved. It is recognized. As a result, even if the tracking of the game ball has been interrupted due to the occurrence of clogging (abnormality), it is possible to quickly resume tracking when the clogging (abnormality) has been resolved. It is possible to prevent the tracking accuracy from being lowered.

<Clogging / disappearance detection (modification)>
In the first embodiment, it has been described that it is determined that a ball clogging has occurred when at least one of the following conditions (i) and (ii) is satisfied.
(I) A phenomenon (disappearance) that the position of the game ball does not change over a predetermined time occurs more than a predetermined number of times in a predetermined area. (Ii) The position of one game ball and the positions of other game balls Over the image (overlapping) occurs more than a predetermined number within a predetermined area

  In the fifth embodiment, only the condition (i) has been described. However, in the present invention, the condition (i) or the condition (ii) is used as a condition for determining that a ball clogging has occurred. You may employ | adopt independently and it is good also as combining said both (i) and said (ii) conditions. Hereinafter, as a modification, a case where both the above conditions (i) and (ii) are used together will be described.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing processing relating to clogging / disappearance detection executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing processing relating to clogging elimination detection executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining a region for detecting clogging of balls.

  In the process related to clogging / disappearance detection shown in FIG. 84, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of steps S2351 to S2353. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S351 to S353 of FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S2351 that there is no game ball that has not moved for a certain time or after the processing of step S2353, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the clogging flag is set to ON (step S2351). S2354). The clogging flag is a flag indicating that a ball clogging has occurred (see step S2360 and step S2366).

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the clogging flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of steps S2355 to S2357. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S354 to S356 of FIG. Therefore, description here is omitted.

  In step S2357, when it is determined that there are a predetermined number (for example, three) or more disappearance points in the disappearance detection area set in step S2356, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification (step S2358). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball clogging occurrence signal indicating that a ball clogging has occurred to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. As a result, an image for informing that the clogging has occurred is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound for informing that the clogging has occurred is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball clogging occurrence signal indicating that a ball clogging has occurred to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 starts addition of the re-notification timer (step S2359). The value of the re-notification timer corresponds to the elapsed time since it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred, and is used when error notification is performed again (see step S2404 in FIG. 85). Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 sets the clogging flag to ON (step S2360), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2355 that less than a predetermined number (for example, three) of lost points are set, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a game ball that overlaps with another game ball (step S2355). S2361). In this process, the sub CPU 201 overlaps the game balls on the ball position image obtained by the difference extraction process between the previous and next frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31) (step S358 in FIG. 47). It is determined whether or not c) has occurred. As described above, the position of the game ball in the ball position image is determined by the position coordinates (the X-axis coordinate value and the Y-axis coordinate value) of the center of gravity of the game ball on the XY orthogonal coordinate plane (see FIG. 67). expressed. In the ball position image, the game ball is a circle having a certain size, and the center of the circle coincides with the gravity center. Here, with respect to one game ball (for example, a game ball of ID (1)) and another game ball (for example, a game ball of ID (2)), the positions of the centers (centers of gravity) are respectively (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ), and the radii are r ₁ and r ₂ , respectively. If the distance between (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) is shorter than the sum of the radii of two circles corresponding to these game balls (r ₁ + r ₂ ), these two games The balls will overlap. In this way, the sub CPU 201 compares the magnitude relationship between the distance between the centers of the circles corresponding to the two game balls and the sum of the radii, so that there is an overlap between the two game balls. It can be determined whether or not.

Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may determine whether or not there is an overlap between two game balls as follows. Here, a game ball (radius r ₁ ) with ID ( ₁ ) and a game ball (radius r ₂ ) with ID (2) are arranged side by side, and the game ball with ID (1) is ID (2). It is assumed that it is located on the left side of the game ball. The X coordinate value of the left end portion of the game ball with ID (1) is X1, the X coordinate value of the right end portion is X2, and the X coordinate value of the left end portion of the game ball with ID (2) is X3. The value of the X coordinate of the part is X4. When the game ball with ID (1) and the game ball with ID (2) overlap, there is a relationship of X1 <X3 <X2 <X4 or a relationship of X4-X1 <(r ₁ + r ₂ ) × 2. It will be established. Similarly, a game ball with ID ( ₁ ) (radius r ₁ ) and a game ball with ID (2) (radius r ₂ ) are arranged vertically, and the game ball with ID (1) is ID (2). It is assumed that it is located above the game ball. The Y coordinate value of the upper end portion of the game ball with ID (1) is Y1, the Y coordinate value of the lower end portion is Y2, and the Y coordinate value of the upper end portion of the game ball with ID (2) is Y3. The value of the Y coordinate of the part is Y4. When the game ball with ID (1) and the game ball with ID (2) overlap, there is a relationship of Y1 <Y3 <Y2 <Y4 or a relationship of Y4-Y1 <(r ₁ + r ₂ ) × 2. It will be established. The sub CPU 201 may determine whether or not the above relationship is successful in determining whether or not there is an overlap between two game balls. In the above description, the case where the position of the game ball is represented by two-dimensional coordinates has been described. However, as described above, the position of the game ball can also be represented by three-dimensional coordinates. Similarly, it can be determined whether or not there is an overlap between two game balls.

  When it is determined in step S2361 that the game balls overlap with each other, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of step S2362 and step S2363. These processes are the same as the processes of step S359 and step S360 of FIG. It is the same processing. In regard to step S2363, if the points not explained in step S360 of FIG. 47 are supplemented, in this process, the sub CPU 201 determines each overlap (one game ball (for example, ID (1)) based on the process result of step S2361. Game coordinates) and other game balls (for example, overlapping parts of the game balls of ID (2)), the position coordinates of the overlapping parts are specified, and the position coordinates are set in step S2362. It is judged whether it exists in. Then, the sub CPU 201 counts the number of overlaps (overlap portions) existing in the overlap detection area, and determines whether or not the counted number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S 2363 that the number of overlaps (overlaps) existing in the overlap detection area set in step S 2362 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 5), the sub CPU 201 performs steps S 2364 to S 2366. However, since these processes are the same as the processes in steps S2358 to S2360, description thereof is omitted here. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2354 that the clogging flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 executes processing related to clogging elimination detection (step S2367), and ends this subroutine. Hereinafter, a process related to clogging elimination detection will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the process related to clogging elimination detection, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball exists in the ball clogging elimination detection area (step S2401). The area shown in FIG. 83 can be adopted as the area for detecting the clogging of balls, but here, another example of the area for detecting the clogging of balls will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86A shows that “a phenomenon (disappearance) in which the position of the game ball does not change over a predetermined time occurs more than a predetermined number of times in a predetermined area” (condition (i) above) is established. Thus, a region for detecting the clogging of a ball used when it is determined that a ball clogging has occurred (when the clogging flag is set to ON in step S2360 in FIG. 84) is shown. FIG. 86 (b) shows that “the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap each other on the image (overlap) occurs more than a predetermined number in a predetermined area” (above (ii)). This indicates the ball clogging elimination detection area used when it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred (when the clogging flag is set to ON in step S2366 in FIG. 84).

  86A is an area surrounded by each of the clogged object disappearance points, the side A, the side B, and the side C (the area indicated by hatching and hatching in the figure). ). Here, the disappearance point subject to clogging refers to a disappearance point existing in the disappearance detection region (see FIG. 48B). The disappearance detection area has a rectangular shape, and side A is collinear with the left side of the disappearance detection area (rectangle), and side C is the right side of the disappearance detection area (rectangle). It is on the same straight line. The side B is a side where the distance from the center of gravity of the disappearance point that is the reference of the region of the disappearance detection is D, and is located below the disappearance point targeted for clogging with each ball. Side B is the same as the region for detecting clogging of balls shown in FIG. In FIG. 86 (a), the shaded area is a portion where the disappearance detection area and the ball clogging elimination detection area overlap.

  86 (b) is a region surrounded by the respective game balls targeted for ball clogging, side A, side B, and side C (regions indicated by hatching and hatching in the figure). ). Each of the game balls targeted for ball clogging here refers to a game ball having an overlap (an overlapping portion with other game balls) in the overlap detection area (see FIG. 48C). The overlap detection area has a rectangular shape, side A is on the same straight line as the left side of the overlap detection area (rectangle), and side C is the right side of the overlap detection area (rectangle). It is on the same straight line. The side B is a side where the distance from the center of gravity of the game ball serving as a reference for the overlap detection area is D, and is positioned below each game ball targeted for game play. Side B is the same as the region for detecting clogging of balls shown in FIG. In FIG. 86 (b), the shaded area is an overlap between the overlap detection area and the ball clogging elimination detection area.

  In the process of step S2401 of FIG. 85, when the clogging flag is set to ON in step S2360 of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 201 has a game ball in the ball clogging elimination detection area shown in FIG. If the clogging flag is set to ON in step S2366 of FIG. 84, it is determined whether or not a game ball exists in the ball clogging elimination detection area shown in FIG. 86 (b). . 86 (a) and 86 (b) show a state in which the game ball with ID (X) is present in the area for detecting clogging of balls.

  If it is determined that a game ball is present in the ball clogging elimination detection area, the sub CPU 201 notifies that the ball clogging has been eliminated (step S2402). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball clogging elimination signal indicating that the ball clogging has been eliminated to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. As a result, an image for informing that the ball clogging has been eliminated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound for informing that the ball clogging has been eliminated is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball clogging elimination signal indicating that the ball clogging has been eliminated to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall).

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 sets the clogging flag to OFF (step S2403). Although not shown, the processing related to the tracking of the game ball (see step S284 to step S287 in FIG. 31) is executed on condition that the clogging flag is set to OFF. Therefore, the tracking of the game ball is interrupted when the clogging flag is set on in step S2360 or step S2366 of FIG. 84, and is resumed when the clogging flag is set off in step S2403 of FIG. become. After executing the processing of step S2403, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that there is no game ball in the ball clogging elimination detection area, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the re-notification timer (see steps S2359 and S2365 in FIG. 84) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Is determined (step S2404).

  When determining that the value of the re-notification timer is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification again (step S2405). As described above, the value of the re-notification timer corresponds to the elapsed time since it was determined that the ball clogging has occurred, and the value of the re-notification timer being equal to or greater than a predetermined value indicates This means that the state where the occurrence has continued for a certain time or more.

  In the processing of step S2405, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball clogging continuation signal indicating that the ball clogging is continuing to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. As a result, an image for informing that the ball clogging continues is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound for informing that the ball clogging continues is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball clogging continuation signal indicating that ball clogging is continuing to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). This alerts hall clerk and others about the continued clogging of balls and warns that there is a possibility that grapes will be used. it can.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that the value of the re-notification timer is less than the predetermined value, or after executing the processing of step S2405, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In the above, the modification of 5th Embodiment was demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example has the following characteristics.

(6-2) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the positions of a plurality of game balls included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 executing the processes of steps S284 and S286 in FIG. 31);
When the position of the plurality of game balls included in the frame image is specified by the position specifying means, and the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap, An overlap phenomenon recognition means (sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S358 in FIG. 47) for recognizing that an overlap phenomenon has occurred with the other game balls;
When the overlap phenomenon recognition means recognizes that the overlap phenomenon is occurring between one game ball and another game ball, a predetermined range based on the position of the one game ball in the frame image In addition to the overlap phenomenon between the one game ball and the other game balls in the overlap detection region shown in FIG. 48 (c), M (M is an integer) or more overlap phenomena. 47, the clogging phenomenon recognizing means for recognizing that a clogging phenomenon in which a plurality of the overlapping phenomena occur within the predetermined range has occurred. A sub CPU 201) that executes the process of step S361;
After the clogging phenomenon recognizing means recognizes that the clogging phenomenon has occurred, the position of the gaming ball specified by the position specifying means may be a gaming ball in a state where the clogging phenomenon has occurred. When it is determined as belonging to the clogging elimination determination area (the area where ball clogging elimination is detected as shown in FIG. 86B) that is set according to the position where the clogging phenomenon occurs as a difficult or impossible area Clogging elimination recognizing means for recognizing that the clogging phenomenon has been eliminated (sub CPU 201 executing the process of FIG. 85);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the case where clogging (ball clogging) occurs due to the stacking of game balls, it is necessary for the gaming store to appropriately deal with the cause of such clogging (abnormality). Here, when such clogging (ball clogging) has occurred, it is considered that an overlapping phenomenon has occurred in which one game ball and another game ball overlap on the image. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example, when the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap on the image, the one game ball and the other game ball It is recognized that an overlapping phenomenon (“overlap”) has occurred with the sphere. Then, an overlapping phenomenon (“overlap”) between the one game ball and the other game ball within a predetermined range (overlap detection region) based on the position of the one game ball in the frame image. In addition, it is recognized that a clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred when it is recognized that M (for example, four) or more overlapping phenomena (“overlap”) have occurred. Thereby, it is possible to detect that clogging (ball clogging) has occurred due to the stacking of game balls, and an opportunity to eliminate the problem caused by clogging (ball clogging) can be obtained.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, after it is recognized that the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred, the position of the gaming ball is in a state where the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred. When it is determined that the game ball belongs to a clogging elimination determination area (area for detecting clogging of balls) that is set as an area where it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to exist, the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) is resolved. Be recognized. As a result, even if the tracking of the game ball has been interrupted due to the occurrence of clogging (abnormality), it is possible to quickly resume tracking when the clogging (abnormality) has been resolved. It is possible to prevent the tracking accuracy from being lowered.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions in the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment that are applicable in the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Camera image analysis processing>
In the first embodiment, it has been described that the process shown in FIG. 31 is performed as the camera video analysis process (see step S261 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 87 is performed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing camera image analysis processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the camera image analysis process shown in FIG. 87, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of steps S3001 to S3006, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S281 to S286 of FIG. Explanation here is omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes processing related to error determination regarding ball movement (step S3007). The process relating to the error determination regarding the ball movement will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of step S3008 and step S3009. These processes are the same as the processes of step S287 and step S288 of FIG. 31, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Error judgment regarding ball movement>
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing processing relating to error determination relating to ball movement, which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the moving distance of the game ball.

In the process related to the error determination regarding the ball movement shown in FIG. 88, first, the sub CPU 201 detects the moving distance of each game ball (step S3101). Here, as described in the third embodiment, it is assumed that the current time is time T _{N + 2} , and the position information (latest position information) at time T _{N + 1} is stored in the work RAM 203 for the game balls of each ID. (See step S1404 in FIG. 69A). Further, it is assumed that not only the latest position information but also the position information for the most recent predetermined number of frames is held in the work RAM 203. In the processing of step S3101, the sub CPU 201 refers to the position information associated with the work RAM 203 for all IDs currently managed, and stores the latest position information (the position of the game ball at time _{TN + 1} ) and a predetermined value. The time corresponding to K (for example, 1) frame elapses based on the position information (the position of the game ball at time _{TN + 1−K} ) that is the time corresponding to the number (= K, for example, 1) frame. The distance that the game ball has moved between is calculated.

As described in the third embodiment, when a coordinate system (see FIG. 67) defined by the X-axis and the Y-axis is set in the ball position image, the position information of the game ball is the X-axis coordinate value and the Y-axis coordinate. It is represented by the value of Here, for the game ball with ID (1), the position at time T _{N + 1-K} is represented as (X ₁ , Y ₁ ), and the position of the game ball at time T _{N + 1} is represented as (X ₂ , Y ₂ ). To do. On the other hand, as described in the third embodiment, the size of the game sphere included in the ball position image depends on the position of the game sphere (the distance from the CCD camera 1000, that is, the value of the Y-axis coordinate). (See FIG. 66). Therefore, the distance between (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image does not coincide with the distance that the game ball has actually moved on the game board 12 (game area 12a). Become.

Therefore, in the process of step S3101, the sub CPU 201 converts the position coordinates (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image into position coordinates in the game area 12a. As described in the third embodiment, since the game area 12a is formed on a two-dimensional plane, when a coordinate system (see FIG. 89) defined by the x-axis and the y-axis is set on the two-dimensional plane, The position of the game ball in the game area 12a is represented by an x-axis coordinate value and a y-axis coordinate value. The position coordinates in the ball position image and the position coordinates in the game area 12a have a one-to-one correspondence, and the position coordinates in the game area 12a corresponding to the position coordinates (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) in the ball position image are (x ₁ , Y ₁ ), and the position coordinates in the game area 12 a corresponding to the position coordinates (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image are (x ₂ , y ₂ ). Based on a predetermined function, the sub CPU 201 obtains the position coordinates (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image, the position coordinates (x ₁ , y ₁ ) and the position coordinates in the game area 12a, respectively. Convert to (x ₂ , y ₂ ). Then, the sub CPU 201 calculates the distance between (x ₁ , y ₁ ) and (x ₂ , y ₂ ) based on the converted position coordinates. (X ₁ , y ₁ ) indicates the position where the game ball actually exists in the game area 12a at the time T _{N + 1−K} , and (x ₂ , y ₂ ) indicates the game at the time T _{N + 1.} The position where the game ball actually exists in the area 12a is shown. Accordingly, the distance between (x ₁ , y ₁ ) and (x ₂ , y ₂ ) is such that a time corresponding to (K (for example, 1) frame elapses between time T _{N + 1-K} and time T _{N + 1.} It shows the distance that the game ball actually moved. The sub CPU 201 calculates such a movement distance for all currently managed game balls having IDs.

In FIG. 89, as an example of K = 1, when a coordinate system defined by the x-axis and y-axis is set on the two-dimensional plane in which the game area 12a is formed, the game ball with ID (1) is timed. (T ₁ , y ₁ ) between T _N (shooting timing of the image of the first frame) and T _{N + 1} (shooting timing of the image of the second frame) (while the time corresponding to one frame elapses) ) To (x ₂ , y ₂ ). The moving distance of the game ball in this case is also shown.

  After executing the processing of step S3101, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a moving distance calculated for each ID game ball that exceeds a predetermined distance (step S3102). The predetermined distance is a distance that the game ball can move in a time corresponding to K (for example, 1) frame, and is set in advance according to the structure of the game board 12 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The predetermined distance may be determined by performing an experiment in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When determining that there is a game ball whose moving distance exceeds the predetermined distance, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification (step S3103). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a long distance movement generation signal indicating that the moving distance of the game ball has exceeded a predetermined distance to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that the moving distance of the game ball has exceeded the predetermined distance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound for notifying that the moving distance of the game ball has exceeded the predetermined distance is displayed on the speaker 11. Or output from. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a long-distance movement generation signal indicating that the movement distance of the game ball has exceeded a predetermined distance to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall).

If it is determined in step S3102 that there is no gaming ball whose moving distance exceeds the predetermined distance, or after executing the processing of step S3103, the sub CPU 201 detects the moving speed of each gaming ball (step S3104). ). In this process, the sub CPU 201 calculates the moving speed of the game ball with each ID from time T _{N + 1 -K} to time T _{N + 1} based on the position coordinates (position coordinates in the game area 12a) converted in step S3101. To do. The speed has a component in the x-axis direction and a component in the y-axis direction. The component in the x-axis direction is obtained by dividing the displacement in the x-axis direction (x ₁ → x ₂ ) by the time required for the displacement (time corresponding to K (for example, 1) frame). The y-axis direction component is obtained by dividing the y-axis direction displacement (y ₁ → y ₂ ) by the time required for the displacement (time corresponding to K (for example, 1) frame).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a moving speed calculated for each ID game ball that exceeds a predetermined speed (step S3105). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for each ID, whether the component in the x-axis direction and the component in the y-axis direction of the speed calculated in step S3104 are out of a predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the predetermined range for the component in the x-axis direction and the predetermined range for the component in the y-axis direction are set separately. The predetermined range for the x-axis direction component is called an x-axis direction speed allowable range, and the predetermined range for the y-axis direction component is called a y-axis direction speed allowable range. The x-axis speed allowable range is a range of values that can be taken by the x-axis direction component of speed (a range from a lower limit value to an upper limit value), and the y-axis direction speed allowable range is a value of the y-axis direction component of speed. This is the range of values to be obtained (range between the lower limit value and the upper limit value). These ranges are set in advance according to the structure of the game board 12 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. These ranges may be determined by conducting an experiment in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the process of step S3105, the sub CPU 201 determines that at least one of the component in the x-axis direction and the component in the y-axis direction of the speed calculated in step S3104 is outside the allowable range for at least any one ID. Then, it is determined that there is a game ball whose moving speed exceeds a predetermined speed.

  When it is determined that there is a game ball whose moving speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification (step S3106). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a high speed movement generation signal indicating that the moving speed of the game ball has exceeded a predetermined speed to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206. Thereby, an image notifying that the moving speed of the game ball has exceeded the predetermined speed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound for notifying that the moving speed of the game ball has exceeded the predetermined speed is displayed on the speaker 11. Or output from. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a high-speed movement generation signal indicating that the moving speed of the game ball has exceeded a predetermined speed to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall).

  If it is determined in step S3105 that there is no game ball whose moving speed exceeds the predetermined speed, or after executing the process of step S3106, the sub CPU 201 detects the acceleration of each game ball (step S3107). . Each time this subroutine is executed, the sub CPU 201 calculates the moving speed of the game ball in the time corresponding to the most recent K (for example, 1) frame in the process of step S3104. The moving speed of the game ball calculated each time this subroutine is executed is accumulated in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of the game ball. Therefore, the speed stored cumulatively in the work RAM 203 indicates the transition of the speed of each game ball, and the sub CPU 201 can recognize the relationship between the passage of time and the speed change. Thereby, the sub CPU 201 can calculate the acceleration of each game ball by obtaining the amount of change in speed per unit time. Similar to the velocity, the acceleration has a component in the x-axis direction and a component in the y-axis direction.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is an acceleration exceeding a predetermined acceleration among the accelerations calculated for the game balls of each ID (step S3108). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for each ID, whether the x-axis direction component and the y-axis direction component of the acceleration calculated in step S3107 are out of a predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the predetermined range for the component in the x-axis direction and the predetermined range for the component in the y-axis direction are set separately. The predetermined range for the x-axis direction component is called an x-axis direction allowable acceleration range, and the predetermined range for the y-axis direction component is called a y-axis direction allowable acceleration range. The x-axis direction acceleration allowable range is a range of values that the x-axis direction component of acceleration can take (lower limit value to upper limit value range), and the y-axis direction acceleration allowable range is a range of acceleration y-axis direction components. This is the range of values to be obtained (range between the lower limit value and the upper limit value). These ranges can be determined by conducting an experiment in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the y-axis direction coincides with the vertical direction (downward), so that the y-axis direction acceleration allowable range is greatly affected by gravity. It will be. In the process of step S3108, the sub CPU 201 determines that at least one of the x-axis direction component and the y-axis direction component of the acceleration calculated in step S3107 is outside the allowable range for at least one of the IDs. It is determined that there is a game ball that exceeds a predetermined acceleration. The game ball rolls while colliding with various structures (eg, nails) provided on the game board 12, and the y-axis direction acceleration immediately after colliding with these structures is greatly negative (vertically upward). ) Value (value outside the allowable range). Therefore, it is desirable to exclude such y-axis direction acceleration from the determination target. When the game ball collides with such a structure, the y-axis direction component of the speed changes from a positive value to a negative value. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines based on the y-axis direction component of the speed. It is possible to recognize that the game ball has collided with the structure, and the change in the y-axis direction acceleration associated therewith can be excluded from the determination target.

  When determining that there is a game ball exceeding the predetermined acceleration, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification (step S3109). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits an abnormal acceleration generation signal indicating that the acceleration is abnormal to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that the acceleration is abnormal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound notifying that the acceleration is abnormal is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits an abnormal acceleration generation signal indicating that the acceleration has become abnormal to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall).

When it is determined in step S3108 that there is no gaming ball exceeding the predetermined acceleration, or after executing the processing of step S3109, the sub CPU 201 detects the moving direction of each gaming ball (step S3110). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the moving direction of each game ball is downward in the vertical direction or upward in the vertical direction. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines the value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time _{TN + 1-K} for the game ball of each ID based on the position coordinates (position coordinates in the game area 12a) converted in step S3101 (FIG. 89). In the example shown in FIG. 9, y ₁ ) is compared with the y-axis coordinate value (y _{2 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) of the position at time T _{N + 1} . The value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time T _{N + 1} (y _{2 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) is more than the value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time T _{N + 1−K} (y _{1 in the} example shown in FIG. 89). If it is also larger, it is determined that the moving direction of the game ball with the ID is downward in the vertical direction. Conversely, the y-axis coordinate value of the position at time T _{N + 1} (y _{2 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) is the y-axis coordinate value of the position at time T _{N + 1−K} (y in the example shown in FIG. 89). If it is smaller than ₁ ), it is determined that the moving direction of the game ball with the ID is upward in the vertical direction. The method for determining whether the moving direction of the game ball is downward in the vertical direction or upward in the vertical direction is not limited to this method. For example, the position coordinates (position coordinates in the game area 12a) converted in step S3101. ), But using the position coordinates before conversion (position coordinates in the ball position image) as they are, the value of the Y-axis coordinates of the position of the game ball at time T _{N + 1-K and} the position Y of the game ball at time T _{N + 1} It is good also as comparing with the value of an axis coordinate. If the y-axis direction component of the speed calculated in step S3104 is a positive value, it is determined that the moving direction of the game ball is downward in the vertical direction, and the y-axis direction component of the speed is a negative value. If there is, it may be determined that the moving direction of the game ball is upward in the vertical direction.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a game ball whose movement direction is abnormal (step S3111). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a game ball having an abnormal movement direction if the movement direction of any game ball is upward in the vertical direction. Note that immediately after the game ball is released from the ball discharge port 41d to the game area 12a (immediately after passing through the injection area shown in FIG. 39), the game ball has an upward velocity component in the vertical direction. It is normal and it is not abnormal for the moving direction of the game ball to be upward in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is desirable that game balls that have not passed the predetermined time after passing through the injection area (newly assigned an ID) are excluded from the target of this processing.

  If it is determined that there is a game ball having an abnormal movement direction (the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction), the sub CPU 201 issues an error notification (step S3112). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 transmits a backflow generation signal indicating that the moving direction of the game ball is upward in the vertical direction to the display control circuit 205 and the sound control circuit 206. Thereby, an image for informing that the moving direction of the game ball is upward in the vertical direction is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or a sound for informing that the moving direction of the game ball is in the vertical direction is output from the speaker 11. Or Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a backflow generation signal indicating that the moving direction of the game ball is upward in the vertical direction to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). When a game ball collides with a structure (such as a nail), the direction of movement of the game ball can be temporarily upward in the vertical direction. The error notification may be performed for the first time when the number of times that the moving direction of the game ball is directed upward in the vertical direction (the number of backflows) reaches a specific number (see step S3114) without performing the error notification.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the counter counter value in association with the ID of the game ball whose movement direction is abnormal (the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction) (step S3113). In this process, the sub CPU 201 causes the work RAM 203 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the counterflow counter stored in the work RAM 203 as a new counterflow counter value. The number of backflows indicates the number of times that the moving direction is upward in the vertical direction for the game ball with the ID. Note that for a game ball for which the movement direction is determined to be downward in the vertical direction in step S3111, the value of the counter-current counter corresponding to the ID of the game ball may be cleared. If it does in this way, the number of backflows will show the number of times that the direction of movement became the vertical direction upward about the game ball of the ID concerned.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times that the moving direction of the game ball is abnormal (vertically upward) exceeds a specific number (step S3114). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the counterflow counter is larger than the specific number for each game ball ID, and the value of the countercount corresponding to at least one ID is greater than the specific number. When it is determined that the number is large, it is determined that the number of times that the moving direction of the game ball is abnormal (vertically upward) exceeds a specific number.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times that the moving direction of the game ball is abnormal (vertically upward) exceeds the specific number, the sub CPU 201 continues to notify the error until the power is cut off (step S3115). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a backflow continuation signal indicating that the moving direction of the game ball is continuously or intermittently upward in the vertical direction to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. Thereby, an image for informing that the moving direction of the game ball is continuously or intermittently upward is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or the moving direction of the game ball is continuously or intermittently vertical. A sound for notifying that the direction is upward is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 indicates a backflow continuation signal indicating that the moving direction of the game ball is continuously or intermittently upward in the vertical direction with respect to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). Send.

  When it is determined in step S3111 that there is no gaming ball having an abnormal moving direction (the moving direction is upward in the vertical direction), the number of times that the moving direction of the game ball is abnormal (in the vertical direction is upward) in step S3114 When it is determined that the number of times does not exceed the specific number of times, or after executing the processing of step S3115, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix 7>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, there has been known a goto action that attempts to acquire a ball by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, crafted frauds have frequently occurred, and it is desired to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine, the game store is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The present inventor detects abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine by using the technology developed by himself in the process of conducting a intensive study on the technology for tracking the game ball as described above, and prevents illegal acts and I came up with the idea that it could be useful in dealing with a malfunction.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality that has occurred in a gaming machine.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(7-1) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S3004 to S3006 in FIG. 87);
The movement of a game ball when it is determined that the moving distance of one game ball in a predetermined time is greater than or equal to a predetermined distance based on the position of the game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means An abnormality detection means (sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of steps S3101 to S3103 in FIG. 88),
A gaming machine comprising:

  The travel distance of the game ball at a certain time is normally considered not to exceed a certain upper limit depending on the structure of the game board, the firing speed of the game ball, etc. If the value exceeds the upper limit value, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred, and an illegal act has been performed or a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the moving distance of one game ball in a predetermined time (a time corresponding to a predetermined number (K) frame) (the movement calculated in step S3101 in FIG. 88). When it is determined that (distance) is equal to or greater than a predetermined distance, it is configured to detect that the movement of the game ball is abnormal (error notification is performed), so that cheating can be prevented It is possible to provide an opportunity to cope with the malfunction of the gaming machine.

(7-2) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S3004 to S3006 in FIG. 87);
When it is determined that the moving speed of one game ball in a predetermined time is out of a predetermined range based on the position of the game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the movement of the game ball is An abnormality detection means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of step S3104 to step S3106 in FIG. 88) for detecting an abnormality;
A gaming machine comprising:

  The moving speed of the game ball at a certain time is normally considered to be within a certain range according to the structure of the game board, the launching speed of the game ball, etc. If it does not fall within this range, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred and that an illegal act has been performed or that a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the moving speed of one game ball in a predetermined time (a time corresponding to a predetermined number (K) frame) (the speed calculated in step S3104 in FIG. 88). The x-axis direction component and y-axis direction component) are out of the predetermined ranges (x-axis direction speed allowable range and y-axis direction speed allowable range), and the movement of the game ball is abnormal Is detected (error notification is performed), and therefore, it is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent fraud or deal with malfunctions of the gaming machine.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, a goto action (so-called “oil ball”) that attempts to acquire a ball by using an illegal game ball (“oil ball”) coated with oil or the like. Goto ") can be prevented. For example, conventionally, a goto action is known which aims to win an attacker by applying a lard to a game ball to slow down the moving speed of the game ball. In recent years, there has also been a goth act that attempts to increase the frequency of winning a so-called electric chew or attacker by increasing the moving speed of a game ball using oil balls. In such a gotting action using “oil balls”, the moving speed of the game ball in a predetermined time (a time corresponding to a predetermined number (K) frame) where the moving speed of the game ball is faster or slower than usual. May be outside the predetermined ranges (the x-axis direction speed allowable range and the y-axis direction speed allowable range), and the moving distance may also be greater than or equal to the predetermined distance. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to detect that the moving speed of the game ball is increasing or decreasing, and therefore “oil balls” are used. You can quickly detect that you are. For example, if a game ball with extremely slow movement speed is found near the attacker, the game ball is covered with lard, and the game ball may be illegally directed toward the attacker . In addition, when game balls that are moving at a faster speed than usual are occasionally seen, there is a possibility that the winning frequency for the electric chew or the attacker is increased illegally. Thus, by detecting that there is a game ball that moves at a speed different from the normal speed, it is possible to prevent the “oil ball goto” from being performed.

  In the sixth embodiment, each time the subroutine shown in FIG. 88 is executed once, the moving distance of the game ball in the time corresponding to the latest K frame is calculated, and as the subroutine is repeatedly executed, The moving distance is calculated repeatedly. Then, when the latest movement distance out of the movement distances obtained in this way exceeds a predetermined distance, an error notification is performed (see step S3101 to step S3103). In the present invention, among the movement distances obtained repeatedly in this way, not only the latest movement distance (movement distance obtained from the latest one subroutine execution) but also the movement distances of the most recent times (for example, The error notification may be performed based on the movement distance of 10 times obtained from the latest 10 subroutine executions. For example, error notification may be performed when the average of the most recent multiple travel distances (for example, the 10 travel distances obtained from the most recent 10 subroutine executions) exceeds a predetermined distance. The error notification may be performed when the number of times exceeding a predetermined distance among a plurality of most recent times (for example, 10 times) is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%), or the most recent predetermined number of times Minutes (for example, the five movement distances obtained from the most recent five subroutine executions) all exceed the predetermined distance (that is, the movement distance is the predetermined distance continuously for a predetermined number of times). If it exceeds, error notification may be performed.

  Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, every time the subroutine shown in FIG. 88 is executed once, the moving speed of the game ball in the time corresponding to the latest K frame is calculated, and the subroutine is repeatedly executed. Accordingly, the moving speed is repeatedly calculated. Then, when the latest movement speed among the movement speeds obtained in this way exceeds a predetermined speed, an error notification is performed (see steps S3104 to S3106). In the present invention, among the movement speeds repeatedly obtained in this way, not only the latest movement speed (movement speed obtained from the latest one subroutine execution), but also the movement speeds of the latest multiple times (for example, Error notification may be performed on the basis of the ten most recent subroutine executions (moving speed for ten times). For example, the error notification may be performed when the average of the latest multiple moving speeds (for example, the moving speed for 10 times obtained from the latest 10 subroutine executions) exceeds a predetermined speed. The error notification may be performed when the number of times that the predetermined speed is exceeded in a plurality of most recent times (for example, 10 times) is a predetermined rate (for example, 50%) or more, or the most recent predetermined number of times Minute moving speed (for example, the moving speed for five times obtained from the most recent five subroutine executions) exceeds the predetermined speed (that is, the moving speed is set to the predetermined speed continuously for a predetermined number of times). If it exceeds, error notification may be performed.

  Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, every time the subroutine shown in FIG. 88 is executed once, the acceleration of the game ball at the time corresponding to the most recent K frame is calculated, and as the subroutine is repeatedly executed. The acceleration is repeatedly calculated. When the latest acceleration out of the accelerations thus obtained exceeds a predetermined acceleration, error notification is performed (see Steps S3107 to S3109). In the present invention, among the accelerations repeatedly obtained in this way, not only the latest acceleration (acceleration obtained from the latest one subroutine execution) but also the latest multiple accelerations (for example, the latest 10 times) The error notification may be performed based on the acceleration of 10 times obtained from the execution of the subroutine. For example, when the average of the most recent accelerations (for example, 10 accelerations obtained from the most recent 10 subroutine executions) exceeds a predetermined acceleration, error notification may be performed. When the number of times that the predetermined acceleration is exceeded in a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) is a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%) or more, error notification may be performed, or the latest predetermined number of times An error occurs when all the accelerations (for example, the five accelerations obtained from the most recent five subroutine executions) exceed the acceleration (that is, when the acceleration exceeds the predetermined acceleration continuously for a predetermined number of times). Notification may be performed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the moving distance of the game ball exceeds a predetermined distance, the speed of the game ball exceeds a predetermined speed, and the acceleration of the game ball exceeds a predetermined acceleration. It has been described that an error notification is performed if only one of the conditions is satisfied. However, the present invention may be configured so that error notification is performed when two or all of the conditions regarding the movement distance, the speed, and the acceleration are satisfied.

  In the present invention, the “predetermined speed” (speed allowable range, see step S3105 in FIG. 88) differs depending on the position of the game ball in the game area (corresponding to the trajectory drawn by the game ball). It may be allowed. For example, immediately after the game ball is released from the ball discharge port 41d to the game area 12a (immediately after passing through the injection area shown in FIG. 39), the game ball moves with a velocity component upward in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the game ball that has started to fall basically moves with a velocity component downward in the vertical direction. In other words, immediately after the game ball is released from the ball discharge port 41d to the game area 12a, the game ball tends to move upward against gravity, so the game ball stays in the upper part of the game area 12a ( It takes a long time to bounce off a nail or other structure and fall down). On the other hand, with the passage of time, the downward speed is increased by the action of gravity, and it is assumed that the game ball falls freely. Correspondingly, if the game ball is within a certain range from the injection area (or if the elapsed time since the ID was assigned in the injection area is less than a predetermined time), the game ball is out of the range. The range of values that can be taken by the component in the y-axis direction of the velocity (lower limit value and upper limit value) It may be allowed. Specifically, assuming that an xy coordinate system as shown in FIG. 89 is set, if the game ball is outside a certain range based on the injection area (elapsed time since the ID was assigned in the injection area) If the game ball is within the range (if the time is greater than or equal to the predetermined time) (if the elapsed time since the ID was assigned in the injection area is less than the predetermined time), the component of the velocity in the y-axis direction is removed. It is possible to set the y-axis direction speed allowable range so that the upper limit value (lower limit value) of the obtained value is increased. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately manage the movement of the game ball from the release to the game area as described above until the free fall.

Further, the allowable range of speed for one game ball is the speed of the game ball calculated in the previous subroutine (see step S3104 in FIG. 88) and the acceleration of the game ball calculated in the previous subroutine (step in FIG. 88). S3107) may be determined as needed. That is, for one game ball, the x-axis direction component of the velocity calculated in the previous subroutine is v _x , the acceleration x-axis direction component is a _x , and the time interval from the previous subroutine to the current subroutine (FIG. 88). If the time interval at which the process is executed is t (for example, 4 ms), the component in the x-axis direction of the velocity that will be calculated in the current subroutine has a constant acceleration during that time (game ball motion) Is approximately equal to v _x + a _x × t. The allowable range of the speed calculated in the current subroutine may be calculated based on such an expected value (v _x + a _x × t). For example, a range in which the lower limit is (v _x + a _x × t−α _x ) and the upper limit is (v _x + a _x × t + β _x ) can be set as the x-axis direction speed allowable range. . Similarly, for one game ball, the y-axis component of the velocity calculated in the previous subroutine is v _y , the y-axis component of acceleration is a _y , and the time interval from the previous subroutine to the current subroutine (see FIG. The time interval at which the processing of 88 is executed is t (for example, 4 ms), the lower limit value is (v _y + a _y × t−α _y ), and the upper limit value is (v _y + a _y × t + β _y ). Such a range can be set as the y-axis direction speed allowable range. α _x , β _x , α _y , and β _y are predetermined values, and can be calculated by experiments or the like. In particular, the motion of the game ball in the x-axis direction can be assumed to be a uniform motion if the friction between the game ball and the game board 12 and the like is ignored. The expected value is the same value (v _x ) as the previous time. Therefore, it is possible to set a range in which the lower limit value is (v _x −α _y ) and the upper limit value is (v _x + β _y ) as the x-axis direction speed allowable range.

In the sixth embodiment, the position coordinates in the ball position image are converted to the position coordinates in the game area 12a (see step S3101 in FIG. 88). However, in the present invention, such coordinate conversion is not necessarily performed. When coordinate conversion is not performed, the upper limit value of the moving distance (see step S3102), the allowable range of speed (see step S3105), and the allowable range of acceleration (see step S3108) are represented in the coordinate system (see FIG. 67) in the spherical position image. The XY coordinate system shown in FIG. For example, in order to determine whether or not the moving distance exceeds the upper limit value, the distance from the position is less than or equal to the upper limit value based on the position of the game ball in the previous frame image (time T _{N + 1−K} ). Such a range (a range as shown in FIG. 67) may be set to determine whether or not the position of the game ball in the current frame image (time T _{N + 1} ) is within the range. In that case, similarly to FIG. 67, the range may be sized according to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball in the previous frame image (time T _{N + 1−K} ).

<Appendix 8>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, there has been known a goto action that attempts to acquire a ball by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, crafted frauds have frequently occurred, and it is desired to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine, the game store is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The present inventor detects abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine by using the technology developed by himself in the process of conducting a intensive study on the technology for tracking the game ball as described above, and prevents illegal acts and I came up with the idea that it could be useful in dealing with a malfunction.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality that has occurred in a gaming machine.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(8-1) A game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S3004 to S3006 in FIG. 87);
For one game ball, the position of the one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to one time and the position of the one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to a time later than the one time Whether the change in the position of the one game ball from the one time to a time later than the one time corresponds to a reverse flow that cannot occur under the normal flow of the game ball. Backflow detection means (sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S3107, step S3108, step S31110, step S3111, step S3113, and step S3114 in FIG. 88);
An abnormality detection means capable of detecting that the movement of the game ball is abnormal based on a determination result by the backflow detection means;
A gaming machine comprising:

When the game ball moves in the game area, gravity acts on the game ball, but if the game ball moves against the gravity, some abnormality has occurred and cheating has been performed. There may be a problem with the gaming machine. If a reverse flow (moving upward in the vertical direction) occurs in a manner that cannot occur when the game ball is normally flowing down, the game ball is moving against gravity. there is a possibility. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the position of one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to one time (time T _{N + 1−K} ) (for example, (x ₁ , y ₁ )) and the position of the one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to a time later than the one time (time T _{N + 1} ) (for example, (x ₂ , y ₂ ) and the one game between the one time (time T _{N + 1−K} ) and a time later than the one time (time T _{N + 1} ). It is determined whether or not the change in the position of the ball corresponds to a reverse flow that cannot occur under the flow of a normal game ball. Thereby, it is possible to detect that the game ball is moving against gravity, and it is possible to detect that the movement of the game ball is abnormal based on the detection result. Thereby, it is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent fraud or deal with the malfunction of the gaming machine.

In the sixth embodiment, if there is a game ball having an abnormal movement direction (the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction), it is detected that the movement of the game ball is abnormal (error notification is performed). This has been described (see step S3111 and step S3112 in FIG. 88). However, in the present invention, as a condition for performing error notification, it is not sufficient that there is a game ball whose moving direction is upward in the vertical direction, and when a more restrictive condition is satisfied, Error notification may be performed. For example, the error notification may be performed on the condition that there is a gaming ball whose vertical upward moving distance is a predetermined distance or more. The vertical movement distance of _one game ball is the y-axis coordinate value (y _{1 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) of the position of the game ball at time T _{N + 1-K and} the game ball at time T _{N + 1} . Can be calculated as a difference from the value of the y-axis coordinate at the position (y _{2 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) (see step S3110 in FIG. 88). Moreover, it is good also as performing error alert | reporting on condition that the game ball | bowl whose moving time to a perpendicular direction upward is more than predetermined time exists. That the upward movement time in the vertical direction is equal to or longer than the predetermined time is synonymous with the fact that the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction for a predetermined number of times, and can be determined by the method described in step S3113 in FIG. Is possible. Such a condition relating to the upward movement distance in the vertical direction and a condition relating to the number of movements in the upward direction in the vertical direction may be used independently, or both conditions may be combined. For example, it is also possible to perform error notification on condition that there is a game ball in which the upward moving distance in the vertical direction is equal to or longer than a predetermined distance.

  As described above, “a reverse flow that cannot occur in the flow of a normal game ball” can be detected by appropriately setting the conditions related to the upward movement distance in the vertical direction and the conditions related to the number of times of upward movement in the vertical direction. Here, “a reverse flow that cannot occur under the flow of a normal game ball” refers to a “reverse flow” that excludes “a reverse flow that can occur under the flow of a normal game ball”. “Backflow” means that the game ball moves upward in the vertical direction. As described above, when the game ball is normally flowing down, as described above, when the game ball collides with some structure (such as a nail), the moving direction of the game ball is temporarily upward in the vertical direction. And a case in which the game ball rolls upward on a surface that is inclined in the vertical direction and has a height difference (for example, a so-called stage for guiding the game ball to the starting port). In such a “back flow that can occur under the flow of a normal game ball”, the vertical upward movement distance and the vertical upward movement frequency are within a certain range depending on the structure of the gaming machine (game board). Where it is considered to be within the range, the range can be determined by conducting an experiment. In the present invention, the range obtained in this way is set in advance, and “backflow” that does not fall within the range is detected as “backflow that cannot occur under normal game ball flow”. Is possible.

  Alternatively, when the game ball flows down the game area, gravity acts on the game ball, and the y-axis direction component of acceleration basically matches the gravitational acceleration (or a value close thereto), and the game ball is played by the game ball. It is considered to be substantially constant while flowing down the area. Strictly speaking, the value of the component in the y-axis direction of acceleration may not match the gravitational acceleration due to friction or air resistance generated between the game board or a structure provided on the game board and the game ball. However, this value is considered to fall within a certain range according to the structure of the gaming machine (game board), and the range of values that the y-axis direction component of such acceleration can take (y-axis direction acceleration) The allowable range can be obtained by conducting an experiment. In the present invention, when the y-axis direction allowable acceleration range obtained in this way is set in advance and the y-axis direction component of acceleration is outside the allowable range, The configuration may be such that it is determined that an “unavailable back flow” has occurred.

(8-2) a game board (for example, game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) to which a game ball can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S3004 to S3006 in FIG. 87);
Based on the position of one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to one time and the position of the one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to a time later than the one time, the one Direction detection means for detecting the direction of movement of the one game ball from the time to the time after the one time (sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S3110 in FIG. 88);
Based on the moving direction of the game ball detected by the moving direction detecting means, abnormality detecting means capable of detecting that the movement of the gaming ball is abnormal (the processing of steps S3111 to S3115 in FIG. 88 is executed). Sub CPU 201),
A gaming machine comprising:

When a game ball moves in the game area, the route that the game ball can normally follow is generally determined, and if the game ball moves off this route, some abnormality has occurred and fraudulent activity has occurred. There is a possibility that it has been carried out or a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the position of one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to one time (time T _{N + 1−K} ) (for example, (x ₁ , y ₁ )) and the position of the one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to a time later than the one time (time T _{N + 1} ) (for example, (x ₂ , y ₂ ) based on the movement of the one game ball from the one time (time T _{N + 1−K} ) to a time later than the one time (time T _{N + 1} ). A direction (vertically downward or vertically upward) is detected. As a result, it is possible to detect that the movement of the game ball is abnormal when the direction of movement of the game ball is different from the normal direction (vertically upward), thereby preventing cheating or game It is possible to provide an opportunity to respond to the malfunction of the machine.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the so-called “ball with thread”. That is, when an illegal game ball with a thread (“ball with thread”) is used, the direction of movement of the game ball is different from the normal direction (particularly, the position of the game ball rises against gravity). )there is a possibility. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, since it is possible to detect that the moving direction of the game ball is upward in the vertical direction, the “ball with thread” is used. I can detect it as soon as possible. For example, in a goto action using a ball with a thread, a game ball with a thread is inserted from an upper plate, the game ball is fired by a launching device, and the game ball passes through a winning device and then pulls the thread. Thus, the game ball is operated so as to move back and forth at the place where the sensor for winning detection is installed (the winning detection is made even if the game ball is not fired). When the game ball moves back and forth at the location where the sensor is installed, the operation of the game ball moving upward and then moving upward is repeated. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, Such an unnatural motion (upward movement) of the game ball can be detected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the “threaded ball goto” from being performed.

Further, in the above-described “Grape Goto”, a plurality of game balls may move repeatedly from “Grape” to the starting area or the like while drawing a similar trajectory at a certain time interval. In this regard, if the movement trajectories of a plurality of other game balls are included within a predetermined range based on the movement trajectory of one game ball, all of the movement trajectories of these game balls belong to the predetermined range. Thus, it is possible to consider that the movement trajectories of these game balls are similar. Here, the movement trajectory of the game ball can be subdivided into movement in a minute time. Such “movement in minute time” starts from a vector (in the example of FIG. 89, (x ₁ , y ₁ ) indicating the moving direction of the game ball between a predetermined number of frames (K frames in FIG. 88) (x ₂ , Y ₂ ) as an end point vector). The movement trajectory of the game ball is obtained by connecting a number of such movement directions (vectors). Accordingly, if the movement direction (vector) of other plurality of game balls is included in a predetermined range based on the movement locus of one game ball, these game balls move along the same locus. Will be. As described above, if the movement direction (vector) of each game ball is detected and it is determined whether or not the movement direction (vector) is included in the predetermined range, these game balls follow a similar locus. It is possible to detect drawing. Thereby, it is possible to find a situation where the “grape goto” is going to be performed, and to obtain an opportunity to prevent the goto act from being completed.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment where the description applies to the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, with regard to the configuration for realizing the V winning a prize, the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are provided inside the second big prize opening 54 (see FIG. 5), and the attitude of the displacement member 39 As described above, the game ball is switched between a state where the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is easy and a state where the V winning is impossible or difficult. In 7th Embodiment, another structure is employ | adopted as a structure for implement | achieving V prize.

<Kroon>
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining a configuration for realizing the V winning. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the vicinity of the cron and the stage included in the image photographed by the CCD camera.

  In the present embodiment, the V winning a prize is realized by the configuration shown in FIG. Specifically, four holes are provided in the croon 3001, and one of the four holes constitutes the specific region 3038A. The remaining three holes constitute non-specific regions 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D. When the game ball passes through the specific area 3038A, it becomes a “V prize”.

  More specifically, the game ball that has won the second grand prize opening 54 is guided by a guide path (not shown) and reaches the inclined surface 3002. The inclined surface 3002 is formed to be inclined downward from left to right in front view. The game ball that has reached the inclined surface 3002 flows down to a stage 3003 formed continuously with the inclined surface 3002.

  The stage 3003 is provided with three holes having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the three holes penetrate the stage 3003 in the vertical direction. Thereby, a ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c) for guiding the game ball downward is formed. Of the three ball passages 3004, the ball passage 3004a is closest to the inclined surface 3002, and the ball passage 3004c is farthest from the inclined surface 3002, and the ball passage 3004b is between the ball passage 3004a and the ball passage 3004c. Is provided.

  The upper surface of the stage 3003 is substantially flat, but is formed to have a slight inclination in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In the left-right direction, the vicinity of the center (the formation position of the spherical passage 3004b) is the highest, and the formation position of the spherical passage 3004a and the formation position of the spherical passage 3004c are the lowest. That is, the upper surface of the stage 3003 is inclined downward as it goes to the right from the inclined surface 3002 to the formation position of the spherical passage 3004a, and as it goes to the right from the formation position of the spherical passage 3004a to the formation position of the spherical passage 3004b. It inclines upward, and it inclines below as it goes to the right from the formation position of the ball passage 3004b to the formation position of the ball passage 3004c. In the front-rear direction, the formation position of the spherical passage 3004a is the lowest on the left side of the spherical passage 3004b, and the formation position of the spherical passage 3004c is the lowest on the right side of the spherical passage 3004b.

  Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the stage 3003 formed continuously with the inclined surface 3002 rolls on the stage 3003 and then enters one of the three holes corresponding to the ball paths 3004a, 3004b, and 3004c. The game ball does not stop on the upper surface of the stage 3003 without fail. Also, compared with the two holes corresponding to the ball passage 3004a and the ball passage 3004c, the formation position of the ball passage 3004b is higher than the formation position of the ball passage 3004a and the formation position of the ball passage 3004c. Thus, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004b.

  The ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c) is continuous with the clown 3001, and the game ball that has passed through any of the ball passages 3004a, 3004b, 3004c is carried to the croon 3001. The croon 3001 has a dish-like shape and has a structure that is inclined downward from the periphery to the center. The specific area 3038A and the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D are provided near the center of the crone 3001. The game ball does not stop on the clown 3001 by entering any one of the four holes corresponding to the regions 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D.

  The specific area 3038A and the non-specific area 3038C are substantially coincident with the spherical passage 3004b in the left-right direction in the front view, and the specific area 3038A is closer to the spherical passage 3004b than the non-specific area 3038C. Yes. The non-specific region 3038B is formed on the right side of the specific region 3038A and the non-specific region 3038C, and is slightly on the left side of the ball passage 3004c. The non-specific region 3038D is formed on the left side of the specific region 3038A and the non-specific region 3038C, and is slightly on the right side of the ball passage 3004a. Further, the four holes corresponding to the specific area 3038A and the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D have a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the sizes of the four holes are substantially equal. It has become.

  As described above, when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004b, the probability that the game ball enters the specific area 3038A (V winning and the prize) compared to the case where the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004a or the ball passage 3004c. The probability is higher). When the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004a and when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004c, the probability that the game ball enters the specific area 3038A (the probability of becoming a V prize) is substantially equal. When the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004b, the probability that the game ball enters the specific area 3038A (probability of winning V) is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D. It is high.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004a, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific region 3038D is higher than when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004b or the ball passage 3004c. Yes. When the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004a, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific region 3038D is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the specific region 3038A or the non-specific regions 3038B and 3038C. ing.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004c, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific region 3038B is higher than when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004a or the ball passage 3004b. Yes. When the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004c, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific region 3038B is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the specific region 3038A or the non-specific regions 3038C and 3038D. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a game ball that has reached the stage 3003 after winning the second grand prize opening 54 enters the non-specific area 3038B or non-specific area 3038D with the highest probability (for example, a probability of 1/3 each). Then, the ball enters the specific area 3038A with the next highest probability (for example, 1/4 probability) and enters the non-specific area 3038C with the lowest probability (for example, 1/12 probability). The probability of entering each region is not particularly limited, and may be the same probability (1/4).

  Although not shown, a specific area sensor 3380A is arranged in the specific area 3038A, and the passage of a game ball (V winning) in the specific area 3038A is detected by the specific area sensor 3380A. Similarly, non-specific area sensors 3380B, 3380C, and 3380D are arranged in the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D, respectively, and the passage of game balls in the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D Detected by 3380B, 3380C, and 3380D.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the cron 3001, the ball passage 3004, and the stage 3003 are all included in the imaging range of the CCD camera 1000. The Kroon 3001, the ball passage 3004, and the stage 3003 may be covered with a glass plate or the like made of a transparent member. In this case, however, the game balls that move these are visible to the player. Thus, the game ball is also included in the image obtained by the photographing by the CCD camera 1000 (see FIG. 91).

<Command analysis processing>
In the first embodiment, it has been described that the process shown in FIG. 29 is performed as the command analysis process (see step S204 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 92 is performed.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The command analysis process shown in FIG. 92 is basically the same as the command analysis process shown in FIG. In brief, the sub CPU 201 analyzes various commands received from the main control circuit 70 (step S3501). Although not described in the first embodiment, commands received from the main control circuit 70 include a V winning success command and a V winning failure command. The V winning success command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 when the V winning is successful. The V winning failure command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 when the V winning is unsuccessful.

  Specifically, when the V winning is successful (when the game ball enters the specific area 3038A), a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70 from the specific area sensor 3380A arranged in the specific area 3038A. The By receiving the detection signal, the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 recognizes that the V winning is successful. Then, the main CPU 71 generates a V winning success command and stores the generated V winning success command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 73. The V winning success command includes information (V winning success information) indicating that the V winning is successful (the game ball has entered the specific area 3038A).

  Similarly, when the V winning is unsuccessful (when a game ball enters any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D), the non-specific area sensors respectively disposed in the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D A detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70 from any of 3380B, 3380C, and 3380D. By receiving the detection signal, the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 recognizes that the V prize has failed. Then, the main CPU 71 generates a V winning failure command and stores the generated V winning failure command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 73. The V prize failure command includes information (V prize failure information) indicating that the V prize has failed (a game ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D), and the non-specific area 3038B. , 3038C, 3038D, information indicating which game ball has entered is included.

  The V winning success command or the V winning failure command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by command output processing (see step S35 in FIG. 15). Here, as the command output processing, processing similar to the communication data transmission processing shown in FIG. 62 is performed. That is, each time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is performed a predetermined number of times (16 times in the example of FIG. 62), the command stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 73 is sent to the sub-control circuit 200. Will be sent.

  The V winning success command and the V winning failure command are transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 as described above. The command received by the sub control circuit 200 is stored in the work RAM 203. When the received command is a V winning success command, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect pattern (see FIG. 95) corresponding to the successful V winning, and when the received command is a V winning failure command, the sub CPU 201. Determines an effect pattern (see FIG. 95) corresponding to the failure to win the V prize (step S3503). Then, the sub CPU 201 registers the determined effect pattern (step S3505) and ends this subroutine.

<Production mode determination processing>
In 1st Embodiment, it demonstrated as a process shown in FIG. 30 being performed as an effect mode determination process (refer step S205 of FIG. 26). In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, the processing shown in FIG. 93 is performed.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a state where discharge areas are set for specific areas and non-specific areas. FIG. 95 shows an effect pattern determination table.

  In the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 93, first, the sub CPU 201 executes a camera video analysis process (step S3601). The camera image analysis processing is as described in detail in the first to sixth embodiments, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, when the sub-CPU 201 succeeds in the V prize (when the game ball enters the specific area 3038A) or fails in the V prize (the game ball enters the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D). When the ball is entered), an effect pattern corresponding to the success or failure of the V prize is selected, and the selected effect pattern is reflected (registered) in the game data stored in the work RAM 203 (step S3602).

  In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has entered any V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) based on the processing result of step S3601. Judging. In the present embodiment, for each V winning area, an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the V winning area is set as a discharge area (see FIG. 39) (see FIG. 94). Therefore, when the game ball enters any V winning area, the sub CPU 201 makes a determination of “YES” in step S307 of FIG. 42 (that is, information indicating that the game ball belongs to the discharge area ( It is determined that the immediately preceding discharge flag) is set. Here, in the flag immediately before discharge set when the game ball belongs to the discharge area set for the V winning area, the game ball belongs to the discharge area set for any V winning area. (V winning area information) indicating whether or not. Based on the V winning area information, the sub CPU 201 can determine whether or not a game ball has entered any V winning area, and the gaming ball can be placed in any V winning area. When it is determined that the player has entered the ball, the V winning area into which the game ball has entered can be recognized as one of the specific area 3038A and the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D. .

  When it is determined that the game ball has entered any of the V winning areas, the sub CPU 201 determines the V winning that has been won based on the effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 95) stored in the program ROM 202. A production pattern corresponding to the work area is selected. In the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 95, for each V winning area, a range of random values and an effect pattern are defined in association with each other. The effect pattern includes information indicating the effect content according to the success or failure of the V prize. There are four types of V-winning success effects (V-winning success effects 1 to 4) as effects according to the success of the V prize (effects suggesting the success of the V prize). There are four types of V prize failure productions (V prize failure productions 1 to 4) as productions that suggest V prize failure.

  For example, when the player enters the specific area 3038A and the acquired random number value is 100, “EN1” is selected as the effect pattern. The production pattern “EN1” corresponds to the V winning success production 1. For example, when the player enters the non-specific area 3038C and the acquired random number value is 500, “EN10” is selected as the effect pattern. The production pattern “EN10” corresponds to the V prize failure production 1.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when a game ball enters the specific area 3038A, an effect pattern corresponding to a V winning success effect (any of V winning success effects 1 to 4) is always selected. In addition, when a game ball enters any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D, an effect pattern corresponding to the V winning failure effect (any of V winning failure effects 1 to 4) is always selected. Is done.

  In step S3602 of FIG. 93, it is selected when it is determined that the game ball has not entered any V winning area or when it is determined that the game ball has entered any V winning area. After registering the effect pattern (see FIG. 95), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of steps S3603 to S3606. Since these processes are the same as the processes in steps S262 to S265 in FIG. 30, detailed description is omitted, but the sub CPU 201 registers the effect pattern registered in step S3602 and the step S3505 in FIG. Requests (drawing request, sound request, lamp request, and accessory request) for controlling various effect devices (the liquid crystal display device 13, the speaker 11, the LED 59, and various movable accessories, etc.) according to the effect pattern. ) Is generated. Based on these requests, various effect devices are controlled, and various effects such as effects according to the success or failure of the V prize are performed (see step S206 to step S209 in FIG. 26).

  As described above, as the effect pattern according to the winning in the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D), the received command (V winning success command or There is a case where an effect pattern is registered based on the (V winning failure command) (see step S3505 in FIG. 92) and an effect pattern is registered based on the result of the camera video analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93). . Here, the time from when the game ball enters the V winning area until the effect pattern corresponding to the ball is registered is the time when the effect pattern is registered based on the received command (step of FIG. 92). The case where the effect pattern is registered based on the result of the camera video analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) is shorter than the case (see S3505).

  More specifically, as described above, in this embodiment, a command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 every time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is performed a predetermined number of times in the main control circuit 70. For example, if the system timer interrupt process is performed at intervals of 2 ms and the predetermined number of times = 16 times (see step S1055 in FIG. 62), the command is transmitted at intervals of 32 ms. Therefore, after a game ball enters any V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D), an effect pattern (in accordance with the V winning success command or the V winning failure command ( Until the registration of step S3505 in FIG. 92 is registered, a maximum delay of about 32 ms occurs.

  On the other hand, when the time interval of the sub control main process (see FIG. 26) in the sub control circuit 200 is 4 ms, the time interval of the camera video analysis process (see step S3601 in FIG. 93) is also 4 ms. Here, assuming that the frame rate of the CCD camera 1000 is 250 fps (frame image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000 = 4 ms), the sub CPU 201 executes the latest frame image from the CCD camera 1000 each time the camera video analysis process is performed. Is acquired (see step S281 in FIG. 31). In the subsequent game ball tracking (see step S304 in FIG. 42) based on the difference extraction between the previous and subsequent frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31), the position of the previous game ball is specified by a time corresponding to one frame (4 ms). Therefore (see FIG. 33), after the game ball passes the discharge area set for the V winning area, the sub CPU 201 recognizes that (sets the immediately before discharge flag) for 4 ms. take time. Further, the sub CPU 201 makes a “YES” determination in step S307 of the next game medium tracking process (see FIG. 42) (after the time corresponding to one frame = 4 ms has elapsed), so that the game ball becomes a V winning area. In order to recognize that the player has entered the game, after the game ball has entered any of the V winning areas (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D), the effect pattern determination table Based on (see FIG. 95), the delay time until the effect pattern (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) corresponding to the entered V winning area is registered is about 8 ms at the maximum.

  As described above, the time from when the game ball enters the V winning area until the effect pattern corresponding to the ball is registered is the received command (V winning success command or V winning failure command). ) Based on the result of the camera video analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) is shorter than the case where the effect pattern is registered based on (see step S3505 in FIG. 92). In the processing from step S3603 to step S3606, the sub CPU 201 may refer to both of these effect patterns, or the effect pattern registered based on the result of the camera video analysis process reflects the latest information. In view of the above, only the effect pattern may be referred to. In that case, the process of registering the effect pattern based on the command (V winning success command or V winning failure command) (see step S3503 and step S3505 in FIG. 92) may not be performed.

  After executing the process of step S3606, the sub CPU 201 executes a winning information determination process (step S3607). The winning information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S3607, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Winning information determination process>
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a winning information determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the winning information determination process shown in FIG. 96, first, the sub CPU 201 identifies winning information (1) based on the command received from the main control circuit 70 (see step S3501 in FIG. 92) (step S3701).

  In this process, when receiving the V winning success command, the sub CPU 201 specifies information included in the V winning success command. As described above, the V winning success command includes information (V winning success information) indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area 3038A. The sub CPU 201 identifies the V winning success information as the winning information (1) and stores it in the work RAM 203.

  Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives the V winning failure command, the sub CPU 201 specifies information included in the V winning failure command. As described above, the V winning failure command includes information (V winning failure information) indicating that the game ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D. The sub CPU 201 specifies the V winning failure information as winning information (1) and stores it in the work RAM 203.

  Further, when the sub CPU 201 has received neither the V winning success command nor the V winning failure command, the game ball enters any of the V winning areas (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D). Information indicating that no ball is present (non-ball-entry information) is specified as winning information (1) and stored in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 specifies winning information (2) based on the camera video analysis process (see step S3601 in FIG. 93) (step S3702).

  In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3602 of FIG. 93 that the game ball has not entered any V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D). In this case, information indicating that the game ball has not entered any V winning area (non-ball entering information) is specified as winning information (2) and stored in the work RAM 203.

  The sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has entered any V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) in step S3602 of FIG. When it is determined that the V winning area where the game ball has entered is the specific area 3038A, information (V winning success information) indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area 3038A is the winning information (2). And stored in the work RAM 203.

  The sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has entered any V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) in step S3602 of FIG. If it is determined that the V winning area where the game ball has entered is one of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D, the game ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D Is indicated as winning information (2) and stored in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 compares the winning information (1) specified in step S3701 with the winning information (2) specified in step S3702 (step S3703).

  Next, if the sub CPU 201 compares the winning information (1) with the winning information (2) in step S3703 and there is a discrepancy between the winning information (1) and the winning information (2), the sub CPU 201 issues an error notification. This is performed (step S3704). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a flaw between the winning information (1) and the winning information (2) when the winning information (1) and the winning information (2) are different. In particular, the sub CPU 201 receives the command received from the main control circuit 70 when the winning information (1) is the V winning success information and the winning information (2) is the V winning failure information or the non-ball information. And an error signal indicating that there is a discrepancy between the camera video analysis result and the camera video analysis result. As a result, an image notifying that there is a discrepancy between the command received from the main control circuit 70 and the analysis result of the camera video is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or the command received from the main control circuit 70 and the camera video. A sound notifying that there is a flaw between the results of the analysis is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 indicates an error indicating that there is a discrepancy between the command received from the main control circuit 70 and the analysis result of the camera image for the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machine in the hall (game hall). Send a signal. After executing the processing of step S3704, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  As described above, the time from when the game ball enters the V winning area until the effect pattern corresponding to the ball is registered is equal to the received command (V winning success command or V winning failure command). ) Based on the result of the camera video analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) is shorter than the case where the effect pattern is registered based on (see step S3505 in FIG. 92). Similarly, the time from when a game ball enters the V winning area until the information indicating that (V winning success information or V winning failure information) is specified as winning information (1) is as follows. It becomes longer than the time until it is specified as the winning information (2). Therefore, after the game ball has entered the V winning area, a situation occurs where the winning information (2) is the V winning success information or the V winning failure information, while the winning information (1) is the non-winning information. Can do. Therefore, in such a case, if there is a flaw between the winning information (1) and the winning information (2), it will not be immediately determined, but will wait for a predetermined time while holding the winning information (2). Therefore, the winning information (1) and the winning information (2) may be compared again.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix 9>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, there has been known a goto action that attempts to acquire a ball by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, crafted frauds have frequently occurred, and it is desired to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine, the game store is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The present inventor detects abnormalities occurring in the gaming machine by using the technology developed by himself in the process of conducting a intensive study on the technology for tracking the game ball as described above, and prevents illegal acts and I came up with the idea that it could be useful in dealing with a malfunction.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality that has occurred in a gaming machine.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down;
A winning area where game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
A winning signal receiving means for receiving a specific winning signal (V winning success command) indicating that a game ball has entered the specific winning area (specific area 3038A);
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S284 to S286 in FIG. 31);
Based on the position of the game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the winning detection means for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific winning area (the process of step S3602 in FIG. 93). A sub CPU 201) to be executed;
An abnormality can be detected based on whether or not the specific winning signal is received by the winning signal receiving means and whether or not a game ball is detected in the specific winning area by the winning detecting means. Anomaly detection means (sub CPU 201 executing the process of FIG. 96);
A gaming machine comprising:

  Even if a game ball has not entered a certain winning area (specific area 3038A), a winning signal (V winning success command) is received, or a gaming ball has entered a certain winning area (specific area 3038A). However, if the winning signal (V winning success command) is not received, there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred, an illegal act has been performed, or a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine. There is. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, based on the position of the game ball included in the frame image obtained by shooting the game area with the shooting device (CCD camera 1000), a specific prize is awarded. When a game ball enters a region (specific region 3038A), the ball is detected. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a defect between the presence / absence of the detection and the presence / absence of reception of the winning signal (V winning success command), and if there is a defect based on the determination result The flaw can be detected as an abnormality. Thereby, it is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent fraud or deal with the malfunction of the gaming machine.

(9-2) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down;
A winning area where game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
First control means (main control circuit 70) for controlling the game,
Second control means (sub-control circuit 200) different from the first control means,
The first control means includes
A winning signal transmitting means (a main CPU 71 for executing the same processing as in FIG. 62) for transmitting a specific winning signal (V winning success command) indicating that a game ball has entered the specific winning area to the second control means. )
The second control means includes
A winning signal receiving means for receiving the specific winning signal transmitted by the winning signal transmitting means;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S284 to S286 in FIG. 31);
Based on the position of the game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the winning detection means for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific winning area (the process of step S3602 in FIG. 93). A sub CPU 201) to be executed;
An abnormality can be detected based on whether or not the specific winning signal is received by the winning signal receiving means and whether or not a game ball is detected in the specific winning area by the winning detecting means. Anomaly detection means (sub CPU 201 executing the process of FIG. 96);
A gaming machine comprising:

  Even if a game ball has not entered a certain winning area (specific area 3038A), a winning signal (V winning success command) is received, or a gaming ball has entered a certain winning area (specific area 3038A). However, if the winning signal (V winning success command) is not received, there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred, an illegal act has been performed, or a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine. There is. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, when the second control means (the sub control circuit 200) enters a specific winning area (specific area 3038A), Is detected on the basis of the position of the game ball included in the frame image obtained by photographing the image with the photographing device (CCD camera 1000). Therefore, the second control means (sub-control circuit 200) is between the presence / absence of the detection and the presence / absence of reception of a winning signal (V winning success command) from the first control means (main control circuit 70). It is possible to determine whether or not there is a defect, and if there is a defect based on the determination result, the defect can be detected as abnormal. Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first control means (main control circuit 70) and the second control means (sub-control circuit 200) are obtained by cooperation. Double check comparing information to be obtained (winning information (1) shown in FIG. 96) and information (winning information (2) shown in FIG. 96) that the second control means (sub-control circuit 200) can independently acquire This can provide an opportunity to prevent fraud and deal with malfunctions of gaming machines.

(9-3) The gaming machine according to (9-1) or (9-2),
The abnormality detection means is
An abnormality is detected when the specific winning signal is received by the winning signal receiving means while it is not detected by the winning detecting means that a game ball has entered the specific winning area;
It is characterized by that.

  If a winning signal (V winning success command) is received even though no game ball has entered the specific winning area (specific area 3038A), there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the specific winning signal (V winning success command) indicating that the gaming ball has entered the specific winning area (specific area 3038A) has been received. Thus, when it is not detected that the game ball has entered the specific winning area (specific area 3038A), an abnormality is detected. Accordingly, it is possible to detect a situation in which a so-called “radio wave” is about to be performed by illegally manipulating the winning signal, and to obtain an opportunity to prevent the goto action from being completed.

  Further, as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, after the game ball has entered the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D). The time until the effect pattern corresponding to the incoming ball is registered is based on the result of the camera video analysis process than when the effect pattern is registered based on the received command (see step S3505 in FIG. 92). In the case of registering a pattern (see step S3602 in FIG. 93), the pattern becomes shorter. As a result, in the situation where the game ball has entered the V winning area, it is assumed that a relatively long time is required for transmission of a command (V winning success command or V winning failure command) from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. Even in such a case, it is possible to perform an effect (see FIG. 95) according to the success or failure of the V prize based on the result of the camera video analysis process without waiting for the command transmission. It is possible to reduce the delay time until the entry to the winning area is reflected in the production contents. In addition, since the commands (the V winning success command and the V winning failure command) are not indispensable for performing the performance according to the success or failure of the V winning (see FIG. 95), the V winning success command and the V winning failure command are the main controls. The circuit 70 may not be created. In that case, the fact that the V prize has failed (the game ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) may not be detected in the first place, and the game ball may not be detected in the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, The non-specific area sensors 3380B, 3380C, and 3380D for detecting that the ball has entered the 3038D may not be provided. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment detects that a game ball has entered a predetermined area based on the result of the camera video analysis process, and performs an effect in accordance with the detection. Such a feature can be widely applied to a variety of models such as a winning opening where no sensor is provided, and a single shot stand.

<Modification>
In the seventh embodiment, the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) is a result of the camera video analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93). A case has been described in which an effect based on the success or failure of the V winning is performed in accordance with the detection. In the following modification, the movement of the game ball before the game ball enters the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) is based on the result of the camera video analysis process. A case will be described in which an effect according to the success or failure of the V winning (an effect that suggests the success or failure of the V winning) is performed before the entry to the V winning area according to the detection result.

  Hereinafter, modified examples will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99. FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram illustrating a game ball moving on the croon. FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the game ball rolls on the stage. FIG. 98 shows an effect pattern determination table. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a state where a discharge area is set for the ball passage.

  First, as a premise, the processing performed by the sub CPU 201 in step S3602 of FIG. 93 in this modification will be described. The position of the game ball changes with time, but the sub-CPU 201 identifies the position of the game ball at the frame image shooting timing as needed by camera image analysis processing (see step S3601 in FIG. 93). (See step S304 in FIG. 42). Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, the position information of the game ball specified in this way is not only the latest position information but also the position information for the latest predetermined number of frames is held in the work RAM 203. (See step S3101 in FIG. 88). Thereby, the sub CPU 201 can grasp the relationship between “time” and “position of the game ball”. And, the relationship “the position of the game ball changes with the change of time” is established between “time” and “the position of the game ball”, and “the position of the game ball” is It is represented by the value of the X-axis coordinate and the value of the Y-axis coordinate on the XY orthogonal coordinate plane (see FIG. 67). Therefore, for the two variables “the value of the X-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball” and “time”, the “value of the X-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball” can be expressed as a function of “time”. Similarly, for two variables “the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball” and “time”, the “value of the Y-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball” can be expressed as a function of “time”. Thereby, the “value of the Y-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball” can be expressed as a function of the “value of the X-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball”. The sub CPU 201 calculates the function based on the position information of game balls (position information for a plurality of frames) stored in the work RAM 203. The function corresponds to a trajectory drawn by the game ball in the frame image. Such a function is called a trajectory function.

  FIG. 97 (a) shows a situation where one game ball is moving on the croon 3001, and the current position of the game ball is shown as a game ball 120p. The game ball can move on the Kroon 3001 in various trajectories, and FIG. 97 (a) shows two examples of such trajectories.

  In the first example, one game ball moves along the trajectories (I) and (i). The trajectory drawn until the game ball reaches the current position (that is, the trajectory (I) shown in FIG. 97A) can be expressed as the trajectory function described above. In a situation where no external force is applied, since the trajectory (I) and the trajectory (i) are represented as the same function, the sub CPU 201 determines the trajectory (game) (i) based on the trajectory function. It is possible to recognize how the sphere will move in the future. The game ball that has passed through the current position then moves along the trajectory (i.e., the trajectory function) of (i), and the sub CPU 201 selects any V winning area (specific area 3038A, and , Non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) can be recognized that the game ball enters the V winning area. In the example of FIG. 97A, the non-specific area 3038D exists on the trajectory (trajectory function) of (i), and in this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038D. To do. In the second example, one game ball moves along the trajectories (II) and (ii). Similarly to the above, in this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038B.

  As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines which V winning area the game ball enters. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the V winning area determined to be entered based on the effect pattern determination table stored in the program ROM 202. The sub CPU 201 may refer to the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 95, but here, the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (a) is referred to.

  In the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98A, a range of random values and an effect pattern are defined in association with each other for each V winning area. The effect pattern includes information indicating the effect content according to the success or failure of the V prize. There are three types of V prize success productions (V prize success productions 1 to 3) as productions according to the success of the V prize (productions suggesting the success of the V prize). Three types of V prize failure effects (V prize failure effects 1 to 3) are provided as effects that indicate a V prize failure.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when it is determined that the game ball enters the specific area 3038A, an effect pattern ("EN1" to "EN3") corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected. Is higher than the probability of selecting the production pattern (“EN4”) corresponding to the V prize failure production. In addition, when it is determined that the game ball enters the specific area 3038A, the probability of selecting the effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is that the game ball is in the non-specific area 3038B. Probability of selecting the effect pattern ("EN8") corresponding to the V winning success effect when it is determined to enter the ball, corresponding to the V winning success effect when it is determined that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038C And the selection of the effect pattern (“EN16”) corresponding to the V winning success effect when it is determined that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038D. It is higher than the probability. In addition, when an effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”, “EN8”, “EN12”, “EN16”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, the V winning area where the game ball enters is specified. The probability of being in the area 3038A is that the game ball enters when the production pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”, “EN8”, “EN12”, “EN16”) corresponding to the V winning success production is selected. It is higher than the probability that the winning area is one of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D. In addition, when an effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”, “EN8”, “EN12”, “EN16”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, the V winning area where the game ball enters is specified. When the production pattern corresponding to the V prize failure production (“EN4”, “EN5” to “EN7”, “EN9” to “EN11”, “EN13” to “EN15”) is selected as the probability of being the region 3038A The probability that the V winning area where the game ball enters is the specific area 3038A is higher.

  By selecting an effect pattern based on such an effect pattern determination table, an effect corresponding to the success or failure of the V prize is achieved as in the seventh embodiment. Thus, in this modification, it is suggested whether the V winning is successful or failed before entering the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D). be able to.

  In the above modification, the case where an effect (an effect suggesting the success or failure of the V prize) based on the success or failure of the V prize is described based on the movement trajectory of the game ball on the Kroon 3001. Hereinafter, in another modification, a case will be described in which an effect according to the success or failure of the V prize (an effect suggesting the success or failure of the V prize) is performed based on the movement trajectory of the game ball on the stage 3003.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows a state where one game ball is rolling on the stage 3003, and the current position of the game ball is shown as a game ball 120q. The game ball rolls on the stage 3003 in various trajectories, and FIG. 97 (b) shows two examples of such trajectories.

  In the first example, one game ball moves along the trajectories (III) and (iii). Similar to FIG. 97A, in this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball enters the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004b. In the second example, one game ball moves along the trajectories (IV) and (iv). In this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball enters the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004a.

  As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines which of the ball passages 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c corresponds to the hole corresponding to the ball passage (the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004). To determine). Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the ball passage 3004 determined to pass based on the effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 98B) stored in the program ROM 202.

  In the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (b), the range of random values and the effect pattern are defined in association with each other for each of the ball passages 3004 (the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c). Yes. Similar to the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (a), the effect pattern includes information indicating the effect contents according to the success or failure of the V prize. There are three types of V prize success productions (V prize success productions 1 to 3) as productions according to the success of the V prize (productions suggesting the success of the V prize). Three types of V prize failure effects (V prize failure effects 1 to 3) are provided as effects that indicate a V prize failure.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 90, the game ball enters the specific area 3038 </ b> A depending on which of the ball passages 3004 a, the ball passage 3004 b, and the ball passage 3004 c passes through the ball passage 3004. The probability of entering a ball (the probability of becoming a V prize) is different. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004b, the probability that the game ball enters the specific region 3038A (V) as compared to the case where the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004a or the ball passage 3004c (V The probability of winning a prize) is high.

  Correspondingly, in the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004b, the effect patterns ("EN5" to "EN7") corresponding to the V winning success effect. ) Is selected higher than the probability of selecting the production pattern (“EN8”) corresponding to the V prize failure production. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004b, the probability of selecting the effect pattern ("EN5" to "EN7") corresponding to the V winning success effect is V when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004a. The probability of selecting the effect pattern (“EN4”) corresponding to the winning winning effect and the effect pattern (“EN12”) corresponding to the V winning success effect when the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004c are selected. It is higher than the probability. In addition, when an effect pattern (“EN4” to “EN7”, “EN12”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, the probability that the ball path through which the game ball passes is the ball path 3004b is the V winning success effect. When an effect pattern corresponding to (EN4) to “EN7”, “EN12”) is selected, the probability that the ball path through which the game ball passes is the ball path 3004a or the ball path 3004c is higher. In addition, when an effect pattern (“EN4” to “EN7”, “EN12”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, the probability that the ball passage through which the game ball passes is the ball passage 3004b is the V winning failure effect. When an effect pattern corresponding to (EN1 ”to“ EN3 ”,“ EN8 ”to“ EN11 ”) is selected, the probability that the ball path through which the game ball passes is the ball path 3004b is higher.

  By selecting an effect pattern based on such an effect pattern determination table, an effect corresponding to the success or failure of the V prize is achieved as in the seventh embodiment. In this way, in this modified example, it can be suggested whether the V winning is successful or unsuccessful before the game ball passes through the ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c).

  In the above modification, the case where an effect (an effect suggesting success or failure of the V prize) is performed based on the success or failure of the V prize based on the movement trajectory of the game ball on the stage 3003 has been described. Hereinafter, in another modified example, it is detected that a game ball has entered a hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c), and in accordance with the detection, an effect (V A case will be described in which a presentation suggesting the success or failure of the prize is performed.

  Here, in the seventh embodiment, for each V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D), an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the V winning area is a discharge area. It has been described as being set (see FIG. 39) (see FIG. 94). On the other hand, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 99, for a hole corresponding to each ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c), an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the hole is a discharge area (FIG. 39). Thereby, the sub CPU 201 can determine whether or not the game ball has entered the hole corresponding to any of the ball passages 3004 as in the seventh embodiment, and the game ball is any of the balls. If it is determined that the ball corresponding to the passage 3004 has entered the ball, the ball passage 3004 into which the game ball has entered is any one of the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c. (See step S3602 in FIG. 93).

  If it is determined that the game ball has entered a hole corresponding to any of the ball passages 3004, the sub CPU 201 determines based on the effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 98 (b)) stored in the program ROM 202. The effect pattern corresponding to the ball path 3004 that has entered is selected. Thereby, the effect according to the success or failure of the V prize is performed according to the success or failure of the V prize, as in the above modification. In this way, in this modified example, before entering the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) (at the time of entering the ball path 3004), V It can indicate whether the winning is successful or unsuccessful.

  In the above, the modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described.

<Appendix 10>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the production is usually performed based on the start winning prize etc., but the movement of the game ball up to the prize and the contents of the production do not correspond, and both are different. It was common to be. Even in the technology for tracking the movement of the game sphere as described above, there is insufficient contrivance for appropriately reflecting the result of tracking the game sphere on the production, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the production effect. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the production effect.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(10-1) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down;
A plurality of areas (specific areas 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) including a specific area advantageous to the player and into which the game balls flowing down the game area can respectively enter;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S284 to S286 in FIG. 31);
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the effect is presented in a manner that suggests the probability that the one game ball will enter the specific area among the plurality of areas. Production execution means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3602 in FIG. 93),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, a plurality of consecutive frame images are sequentially acquired as moving images obtained by shooting the game area, and the position of the game ball included in each frame image is specified. The Then, based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, an effect (V winning success effect or V winning) is presented in a manner that suggests the probability that the one game ball will enter the specific area (specific area 3038A). Failure production) is performed. In this way, by specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image, the position of the game ball and the probability that the game ball will enter the specific area (specific area 3038A) are associated and reflected in the effect mode. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

(10-2) The gaming machine of (10-1),
A winning device (second winning port 54) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter;
In the plurality of areas (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D), one game ball that has entered the winning device can enter any one of the plurality of areas. Are provided as such,
The position specifying means includes
In a plurality of frame images obtained by photographing the game area after one game ball has entered the winning device, the position of the one game ball included in each frame image is specified,
The production execution means
Based on the position of the one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, an effect according to the position change of the one game ball after entering the winning device is executed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification, a plurality of areas (V winning area) including the specific area (specific area 3038A) are one game that has entered the winning device (second big prize opening 54). Each ball is provided so as to be able to enter any one of a plurality of regions (V winning region). The position of the game ball is specified in a plurality of frame images obtained after a single game ball has entered the winning device (second big prize opening 54), and the position of the specified game ball is specified. Based on, an effect (V winning success effect or V winning failure effect) is performed according to the position change after winning the game ball to the winning device (second large winning port 54). Thereby, since the movement of the game ball after entering the winning device (second grand prize opening 54) can be reflected in the effect mode, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

<Appendix 11>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the production is usually performed based on the start winning prize etc., but the movement of the game ball up to the prize and the contents of the production do not correspond, and both are different. It was common to be. Even in the technology for tracking the movement of the game sphere as described above, there is insufficient contrivance for appropriately reflecting the result of tracking the game sphere on the production, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the production effect. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the production effect.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(11-1) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down;
A plurality of ball passages (a ball passage 3004a, a ball passage 3004b, and a ball passage 3004c) through which the game balls flowing down the game area can respectively pass;
A plurality of areas (specific areas 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) including a specific area advantageous to the player and allowing the game balls that have passed through the ball passage to enter;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S284 to S286 in FIG. 31);
Production execution means for executing the production (sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S3602 in FIG. 93),
The plurality of ball passages and the plurality of regions include a case where one game ball passes a specific ball passage (ball passage 3004b) of the plurality of ball passages, and a case where the one game ball is the specific ball. It is provided so that the probability that the one game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) differs when passing through a ball path other than the path,
The production execution means
One ball path determined as a ball path through which the one game ball passes among the plurality of ball paths based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying unit Execute the production according to the
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, a plurality of consecutive frame images are sequentially acquired as moving images obtained by shooting the game area, and the position of the game ball included in each frame image is specified. The Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, one of the plurality of ball paths (the ball path 3004a, the ball path 3004b, and the ball path 3004c) is the one game. It is determined as a ball path through which the ball passes, and an effect (V winning success effect or V winning failure effect) corresponding to the one ball path is executed. Here, when one game ball passes a specific ball passage (ball passage 3004b) among the plurality of ball passages, and when the one game ball passes a ball passage (ball passage 3004a or ball other than the specific ball passage). The probability that the one game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) differs from the case of passing through the passage 3004c). Therefore, the effect (V winning success effect or V winning failure effect) corresponding to the above-mentioned ball passage is in accordance with the probability that the game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A). Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification, by specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image, the position of the game ball and the game ball enter the specific area (specific area 3038A). Since it is possible to correlate the probability of balling and reflect it in the effect mode, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above modification may be configured as follows.

(11-2) The gaming machine according to (11-1),
The position specifying means includes
In a frame image obtained by photographing the game area after one game ball passes through one ball path of the plurality of ball paths, the position of the one game ball is not specified.
It is characterized by that.

  For example, after a game ball enters a hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004 (while the game ball is passing through the ball passage 3004 or when the game ball is moving on the croon 3001), The position of the game ball is specified because the passage route has a complicated structure (for example, it is not formed as a two-dimensional plane like the game area 12a but has a three-dimensional structure). (Tracking) may become difficult. In addition, for example, it is assumed that a game ball cannot be included in the shooting range due to the positional relationship between the CCD camera 1000 and the Kroon 3001 or the ball passage 3004. Shooting of the game ball may be hindered by structures existing around the croon 3001 and the ball passage 3004. In such a case, for example, a discharge area is set for the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004 (see FIG. 99), and when the game ball enters the hole, the ID of the game ball is released. Then (see step S308 in FIG. 42), it is conceivable to remove the game ball from the tracking target. The croon 3001 or the ball passage 3004 may be set as a masking region (see FIG. 38).

  In such a case, after one game ball passes through the ball passages (the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c) (after passing through the ball passage), the one game ball Since the position in the frame image is not specified, it is impossible to grasp that the game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) in the frame image. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification, by associating the ball passage 3004 and the production mode, the production according to the probability that the game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) (V winning success) Production or V prize failure production).

  In the above description, it has been described that if a V win is made during a big hit, the gaming state after the big win ends will be a probability change gaming state (see FIG. 24), but it is possible to win a V during a small win, A big win may be started by winning a V during a small hit. The model of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a so-called V-accuracy ST machine or a so-called 1-2 type mixer.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. The eighth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions in the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment where the description applies also in the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 100 is a partially exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing a projector unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 102 is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

<Projector unit>
As described in the first embodiment, the upper decoration unit 58 is provided in the upper region on the front surface of the glass door 4 (see FIG. 3). The upper decoration unit 58 is disposed so as to protrude forward of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The interior of the upper decoration unit 58 is formed in a cavity, and the projector unit B is accommodated in this cavity (see FIGS. 100 and 102).

  As shown in FIG. 100, the projector unit B is detachably provided to the upper decoration unit 58. A frame member 4b is provided on the back side of the glass door 4, and the projector unit B is attached to the upper part of the frame member 4b.

  Such a projector unit B functions as projection means capable of projecting an image as an effect, and realizes so-called projection mapping. The projection mapping is generally for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. In this embodiment, in addition to the entire front surface of the game board 12, a decorative member and a movable accessory. By projecting an image based on performance information corresponding to the position and shape of a game ball or the like as a projection target, high-definition and powerful performance display can be realized.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the movement of the game ball in the game area 12a is tracked by the method described in the above embodiment (see FIG. 31), and the game ball or game is played based on the result obtained by the tracking. An effect is produced by projecting an image in the vicinity of a sphere. Such an effect using the projector unit B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. First, the configuration of the projector unit B will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the projector unit B includes a projector cover B1 that is detachably accommodated in the upper decoration unit 58, and a projector apparatus body B2 that is attached to the back of the projector cover B1 and emits irradiation light including an image. A mirror member B3 attached in front of the projector cover B1 so as to be disposed in front of the projector apparatus main body B2 and reflecting the irradiation light from the projector apparatus main body B2 in the direction of the game board 12 disposed obliquely downward and rearward; have.

  The projector apparatus main body B2 is attached to the upper inner surface of the projector cover B1. The projector apparatus body B2 is attached so that the attachment posture and angle can be arbitrarily adjusted. As shown in FIG. 102, the projector apparatus main body B2 emits irradiation light emitted from a light source (not shown) so as to form an image toward the front mirror member B3.

  The mirror member B3 is attached to the inner side surface of the front portion of the projector cover B1. The mirror member B3 is attached such that the attachment posture and angle can be adjusted arbitrarily. As shown in FIG. 102, the mirror member B3 reflects the irradiation light from the projector apparatus main body B2 toward the display area 13a and the game area 12a.

  Although not shown, the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 8) has a projector control circuit, and the projector apparatus body B2 is connected to the projector control circuit. The sub control circuit 200 transmits a drawing request for controlling the projector apparatus main body B2 to the projector control circuit. Thereby, the video output operation of the projector apparatus main body B2 is controlled by the projector control circuit.

  More specifically, the projector control circuit is for performing LED control, focus control, image processing, and the like of the projector apparatus main body B2. The projector apparatus main body B2 includes an optical mechanism and a relay board in addition to the projector control circuit as electrical components. The projector apparatus main body B2 is connected to the sub control circuit 200 via a relay board. The sub-control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit and projects the irradiation light toward the front surface of the game board 12 through the optical mechanism, thereby displaying an image as a visual effect.

  The projector control circuit includes a control LSI, an EEPROM (registered trademark), a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit, an LED driver, and the like. The control LSI controls the DLP control circuit to project the irradiation light based on a command from the sub control circuit 200. The control LSI performs focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light by controlling the focus mechanism and moving the projection lens (not shown) in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control circuit 200. The EEPROM stores a control program by the control LSI and data related to setting / adjustment of the projector apparatus main body B2.

  The DLP system of the projector apparatus main body B2 is mainly configured by a DLP control circuit, an LED driver, an LED light source of an optical mechanism, and a DMD. Under the control of the DLP control circuit, the light reflected by the DMD in a predetermined direction proceeds to a lens unit (not shown), passes through a projection lens (not shown), enters the mirror mechanism B3, and finally the mirror mechanism. By being reflected at B3, it is guided to the front surface of the game board 12. Thereby, irradiation light is projected with respect to the game board 12 used as projection object, and the image | video according to production is formed.

<Production mode determination processing>
In 1st Embodiment, it demonstrated as a process shown in FIG. 30 being performed as an effect mode determination process (refer step S205 of FIG. 26). In contrast, in the eighth embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 103 is performed.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing projector projection content determination processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using a projector.

  In the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 103, first, the sub CPU 201 executes a camera video analysis process (step S4001). The camera image analysis process is as described in detail in the first to seventh embodiments, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes projector projection content determination processing (step S4002). Here, projector projection content determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the projector projection content determination process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an effect pattern (projector effect pattern) for projecting an image is selected by the projector (step S4101). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect pattern selected in the command analysis process (see FIG. 92) or the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 93) is a projector effect pattern. The projector effect pattern corresponds to the effect of projecting a video on the game ball or the vicinity of the game ball by the projector unit B, and when it is “big hit”, when “V winning” is successful, or “V winning” This is an effect pattern that can be selected only when "" fails.

  Specifically, in the command analysis process, the sub CPU 201 uses the effect pattern (projector effect pattern) corresponding to the effect using the projector unit B and the liquid crystal display device 13 when the received command is a big hit start command. One effect pattern to be adopted for the current effect is selected by lottery from a plurality of effect patterns including the effect pattern corresponding to the generated effect (see step S3503 in FIG. 92). The jackpot start command is a command that is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the case of a “hit” in the special symbol game (see step S140 in FIG. 22).

  In the effect mode determination process, as described in the seventh embodiment, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the game ball is based on the position information of the game ball specified in the camera video analysis process (see step S3601 in FIG. 93). When it is determined that the player has entered any V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) (that is, when "V winning" is successful, or "V winning" In the case of a failure), the current effect is selected from a plurality of effect patterns including an effect pattern corresponding to the effect using the projector unit B (projector effect pattern) and an effect pattern corresponding to the effect using the liquid crystal display device 13. One effect pattern to be adopted is selected by lottery (see step S3602).

  As in the case where the jackpot start command is received, the effect pattern may be selected when the V winning success command or the V winning failure command is received. As described in the seventh embodiment, the V winning success command is a sub-control from the main control circuit 70 when the “V winning” is successful (when the game ball enters the specific area 3038A (see FIG. 90)). A command transmitted to the circuit 200. The V winning failure command is a command from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 when the “V winning” is unsuccessful (when a game ball enters any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D (see FIG. 90)). Is a command sent to.

  In step S4101, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an effect pattern (projector effect pattern) corresponding to an effect using the projector unit B has been selected in the above processing.

  When determining that the projector effect pattern is not selected, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the projector effect pattern has been selected, the sub CPU 201 obtains the current position of the game ball and determines it as the projection position by the projector unit B (step S4102).

  In this process, the sub CPU 201 specifies one game sphere suitable for an object on which an image is projected by the projector unit B from the plurality of game spheres existing in the game area 12a. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 sets in advance a predetermined position (for example, a position that is easy to enter the player's field of view) based on the position information of each game ball stored in the work RAM 203 (see step S304 in FIG. 42). The one game ball that is present at the closest position to the specified position) is identified. The sub CPU 201 determines the position of the one game ball as the projection position of the video.

Here, as described in the seventh embodiment, the position of the game ball specified in this way is the position of the game ball at a time point preceding by a time (4 ms) corresponding to one frame. The game ball is considered to have moved from the position specified in the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 42). Here, the sub CPU 201 can calculate the velocity v and the acceleration a at a time point before a time corresponding to one frame (4 ms) (see step S3104 and step S3107 in FIG. 88), and these values are calculated. Referring to the displacement of the position of the game ball at time corresponding to one frame (t), from the formulas for uniformly accelerated motion, it can be expected to ^{(vt + at 2/2)} . The sub CPU 201 may calculate the current position of the game ball using the calculation formula, and determine the calculated position as the projection position of the video. Alternatively, the current position of the game ball may be calculated based on the function indicating the relationship between “position of game ball” and “time” described in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 97).

  The position of the game ball determined as the video projection position as described above is a position on the frame image (for example, a position on the XY orthogonal coordinate plane shown in FIG. 67), and will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the position on the frame image may be converted into the position on the game area 12a (for example, the position on the xy orthogonal coordinate plane shown in FIG. 89).

  After executing the processing of step S4102, the sub CPU 201 selects the projection content based on the type of jackpot and the success or failure of the V winning (step S4103).

  In this process, when the sub CPU 201 selects the projector effect pattern based on the fact that the game is a “hit” (see step S3503 in FIG. 92), the video (FIG. 105 (FIG. 105) The effect pattern which projects b) is selected as a definite effect pattern. The color of the image corresponding to the circle is determined by lottery according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 13), and the color that can be easily determined varies depending on the type of jackpot.

  Further, when the projector effect pattern is selected based on the success of the “V winning” (see step S3602 in FIG. 93), the sub CPU 201 displays a video corresponding to the character “V” for the game ball. The effect pattern for projecting (see FIG. 105A) is selected as the confirmed effect pattern. Further, when the projector effect pattern is selected based on the failure of the “V winning” (see step S3602 in FIG. 93), the sub CPU 201 changes the character or symbol other than “V” to the game ball. An effect pattern for projecting the corresponding video is selected as a confirmed effect pattern.

  In step S 4103, the sub CPU 201 reflects (registers) the confirmed effect pattern selected as described above in the game data stored in the work RAM 203. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  The projector projection content determination process performed in step S4002 of FIG. 103 has been described above using FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S4002, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of step S4003 to step S4006 and ends this subroutine.

  The processes in steps S4003 to S4006 are the same as the processes in steps S3603 to S3606 in FIG. 93, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In particular, the sub CPU 201 determines that the confirmation registered in step S4103 in FIG. A request (drawing request) for controlling the projector apparatus main body B2 is generated according to the effect pattern. Based on the request, the projector apparatus main body B2 is controlled, and an effect of projecting an image on the game ball or the vicinity of the game ball is performed.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, a circle (called a production circle) of a color (red, blue, yellow, etc.) determined according to the type of the big hit is a game board 12 around the game ball. As a result of the display above, the game ball appears to be surrounded by the effect circle (see FIG. 105B). The effect circle and the game ball (the shape in the front view is a circle) are substantially concentric circles in the front view. For example, the radius of the effect circle is 1.5 times the radius of the game ball (1 .About 1 to 2 times). When the V winning is successful, the letter “V” is displayed on the surface of the game ball. As a result, an appearance in which the letter “V” and the game ball are integrated is exhibited. Similarly, when the V winning is unsuccessful, characters and symbols other than “V” (for example, cross marks) are displayed on the surface of the game ball.

  Note that the video may be projected for only a short time, or may be projected continuously over a certain period of time. The projection time of the video is not particularly limited, but the game ball continues to move while the video is being projected. Therefore, it is desirable to change the projection position of the video with time in accordance with the movement of the game ball. Since the sub CPU 201 can update the position information of the game ball that changes every moment with time (see step S304 in FIG. 42), the sub CPU 201 can update the position of the video based on the latest position information of the game ball. The projection position may be updated as needed. Alternatively, when the above-described function indicating the relationship between “position of game sphere” and “time” is used, at the time when one game sphere is determined as an image projection target (see step S4102 in FIG. 104), Can be predicted (see FIG. 97). Accordingly, when one game ball to be projected is determined, video (moving image) data matching such a trajectory is generated in advance and set in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. Accordingly, the process of calculating the projection position of the video at any time becomes unnecessary.

  In this way, by changing the projected position of the video over time in accordance with the movement of the game ball, the video displayed by the projector (as shown in FIG. 105) while the position of the game ball is changing every moment. ("V" or "circle") and the game ball can be maintained relative to each other, and an effect can be produced for a certain period of time while maintaining a sense of unity between the video and the game ball.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix 12>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique for tracking the movement of a game ball by shooting a game ball that rolls in a game area in a pachinko gaming machine with a shooting device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by shooting is known. No. 2005-237864).

  However, in the conventional techniques as described above, there are insufficient ideas for reflecting the tracking result of the game ball in the effect, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the production effect.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(12-1) a game board (game board 12) having a game area (game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A projection device (projector unit B) capable of projecting an image;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31) that sequentially acquires a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by shooting the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of steps S284 to S286 in FIG. 31);
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the projection is performed on the one game ball or the game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball. Image projection means for projecting an image by the apparatus (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of FIG. 104);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, a plurality of continuous frame images are sequentially acquired as moving images obtained by shooting a game area, and the position of a game ball included in each frame image is specified. Is done. Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, an image is projected onto the one game ball or a game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball. As a result, the synergy between the game ball and the video can create a visual effect that is not found in conventional game machines, and can produce a novel effect.

  Here, the “video projection means” projects a video onto one game ball or a game board within a predetermined range from one game ball, and the function of projecting a video onto one game ball; Of the functions for projecting video to a game board within a predetermined range from one game ball, it has only one function and may not have the other function. It may be configured to execute either one of the functions.

  In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that an effect circle is displayed on the game board 12 within a predetermined range from the game ball as an image projected by the projector in the case of a big hit (FIG. 105 (b) )reference). Here, on the appearance, in order to create a sense of unity between the video projected by the projector and the game ball, the effect circle may be displayed in the vicinity of the game ball on the game board 12. desirable. For example, the predetermined range can be set as “a range in which the distance from the center of the one game ball is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball when the game machine is viewed from the front”. Note that the image projected around the game ball is not limited to a circle, and the game ball may be surrounded by a square, a rhombus, a triangle, or the like.

  In addition, although it has been described that the letter “V” is displayed on the game ball when the V prize is successful (see FIG. 105A), it is not limited to “V”, and any character, symbol, The color or the like can be displayed on the game ball. For example, when the V winning is successful, a character “winning” may be displayed on the game ball, or a red color may be displayed on the game ball. In addition, nothing may be displayed when the V winning is unsuccessful.

  Further, as described in the modification of the seventh embodiment (see FIGS. 97 to 99), the game ball enters the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D). If an effect related to the V prize (see FIG. 105 (a)) as in the present embodiment is performed according to the movement trajectory of the game ball or the ball entering the ball passage 3004 before the game ball (or The probability of succeeding in the V prize can also be suggested by characters, symbols, colors, etc. displayed on the game board in the vicinity of the game ball. For example, as the “V winning success effect” in the effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 95 and 98), an effect (see FIG. 105A) displaying the letter “V” is adopted, and the “V winning failure effect” is adopted. For example, an effect of displaying a character other than “V” (or displaying nothing) may be adopted.

  In addition, when a big hit or a successful V prize is awarded, an image is projected onto the game ball (or the vicinity of the game ball) by a projector, while the liquid crystal display device also wins a big win or a V prize. It is possible to configure to perform such effects. Furthermore, a screen capable of displaying an image projected by the projector may be provided, and an effect relating to the big hit or the V prize may be performed on the screen. By configuring in this way, the effect for the rolling game ball (or the vicinity of the game ball), the effect on the liquid crystal display device, and the effect on the screen are executed at the same timing, and these effects are given to the player. At the same time, players can be attracted by experiencing them, thereby enhancing the fun of the game.

(12-2) The gaming machine of (12-1),
The image projection means includes
In accordance with the movement of the one game ball, the projected position of the image is changed over time.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, since the projected position of the image changes with time according to the movement of the game ball, it is possible to link the movement of the game ball and the projected image. There is a more attractive production.

  In the eighth embodiment, the projector is described as projecting an image on the game ball moving in the game area 12a or the game board 12 near the game ball. However, in the present invention, the projector The game sphere to be projected is not limited to the game sphere moving in the game area. For example, a game ball that has entered the out mouth 55 (see FIG. 5) is kept in a region that can be viewed by the player for a certain period of time, and a video is projected by the projector onto the game ball that exists in the region. It is good.

<Modification>
FIG. 106 is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present modification irradiates the irradiation light including the image directly from the projector device main body B2 to the front surface of the game board 12 without providing the projector unit B with the mirror member. Is configured to do. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize the projector effect (see FIG. 105) described in the eighth embodiment.

  Note that the irradiation light emitted from the projector apparatus main body B2 passes through the lower end portion of the upper decoration unit 58. In the eighth embodiment, the upper decoration unit 58 is not blocked by the irradiation light. The lower end part of the decoration unit 58 has a light-transmitting structure. On the other hand, in the present modification, a hole for allowing the irradiation light emitted from the projector apparatus main body B2 to pass is provided in the lower end portion of the upper decoration unit 58. On the other hand, a protective glass 29 is separately provided in front of the protective glass 28. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the projector device main body B2 through the hole provided in the lower end portion of the upper decoration unit 58.

  FIG. 107 is an external perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 109 is a schematic side view showing a state of projection from the projection means onto the projection area.

  Another modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present invention, the arrangement positions of the photographing device (camera) and the projection device (projector) are not particularly limited, and the configuration as in this modification can also be adopted. In this modification, a rear projector that projects irradiation light from the back is employed as the projection device (projection means).

  As shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present modification includes, for example, a game area 4095 in which a game ball can roll down and a projection area (first area provided on the back side of the game area 4095). A projection frame 4121, a second projection region 4141) and a main body frame 4001 detachably provided, and an opening 4009 (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game area 4095 can be visually recognized. A front frame 4007 rotatably supported by the main body frame 4001 in front of 4001 (a side facing (opposite) the player) and a rear of the main body frame 4001 (rear in the depth direction of the gaming machine). And a holding frame 4011 that holds the projection means (first projection means 4143, second projection means 4147) at predetermined positions.

  The front frame 4007 has various decoration members (top decoration 4019, right decoration member 4021, left decoration member 4023), translucent member unit 4067, storage means 4025, and a launching handle that allows the player to directly touch the launching device ( Operation means) 4079, and the like.

  The main body frame 4001 is provided with a main body frame opening 4003 having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 4009 at a predetermined position facing the front frame opening 4009. And a projection area (first projection area 4121, second projection area 4141) provided on the back side of 4095. Further, although not shown in the figure, there are also provided an audio effect device for producing an effect by a predetermined sound, and various control boards / relay boards such as a main control board and a sub control board.

  As shown in FIG. 109, a CMOS camera 4053 (or a CCD camera) is provided at a predetermined position on the side surface of the storage unit 4025, that is, the right side surface (the side surface facing the firing handle 4079) toward the storage unit 4025. The direction of the camera is set so that an image can be taken in the direction of the game area 4095.

  In addition, in this modified example, in addition to the projection area (first projection area 4121) arranged behind the game area 4095, the upper projection area (second projection area) so as to be positioned above the game area 4095. 4141). Therefore, if the presentation is performed by the second projection area 4141 located above the launching apparatus 4091, the decorative member 4093 and the first projection area 4121 in front of the launching apparatus 4091, a powerful presentation is provided to the player. It becomes possible to do.

  The projection area is arranged behind the game board 4097, and a plurality of projection areas are arranged in the vertical direction, and a predetermined image is projected by the projection means described later. In this modification, a rear transmissive screen type having a predetermined shape is assumed, and two screens are provided vertically in the height direction (vertical direction) of the gaming machine. In this modification, the lower projection area is referred to as a first projection area 4121 and the upper projection area is referred to as a second projection area 4141 for convenience.

  The first projection area 4121 is detachably attached to the main body frame 4001 so as to be disposed behind the game area 4095, and is formed in a flat shape, and is provided at a substantially central area at the front of the gaming machine. A substantially rectangular screen having a convex region 4123 projecting in an arc shape toward is assumed.

  The first projection area 4121 displays, for example, information related to the game result of the player through a first projection means 4143 described later, and is displayed on the game board 4097 as a game information display area. For example, predetermined game information such as the player's current number of balls, number of jackpots, number of times of continuation, number of times of probability fluctuation entry, and the like is assumed.

  That is, when the player plays a game against the gaming machine, the first projection area 4121 (game board 4097) is visually recognized as looking down slightly from above. Therefore, as long as at least a part has an inclined surface 4123a inclined obliquely upward as seen from the front like the convex region 4123 of this modification, game information is projected as described above. Even in this case, game information and the like projected on the convex region 4123 can be easily seen by the player. For example, when the second projection area 4141 is provided as a main projection area and the first projection area 4121 is provided as a sub projection area for a player, it is considered that there is a high frequency of having a line of sight upward. Therefore, when the first projection area 4121 that is the sub projection area is viewed, the line of sight is directed from the upper side to the lower projection area, so that information on the game result is displayed in the upper area of the inclined projection area. This makes it easier for the player to see the information displayed in the lower projection area.

  The first projection region 4121 is provided with a through hole (light guide hole) having a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion of the game board 4097. For example, the through hole is formed at a position corresponding to a game nail provided in the game board 4097 with a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game nail. As a result, the light projected from the first projection means 4143 passes through the through-hole provided in the first projection region 4121, and the game nail provided in the game board 4097 is caused to emit light from the root to the tip. it can. In addition, it is assumed that the through hole is not only provided at a position corresponding to the game nail, but is drilled in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to a predetermined position of the game board 4097 or a position corresponding to another game member, It is possible to respond according to the location where the light emission is produced. It is also possible to project an image on the game ball (or the vicinity of the game ball) through such a through hole.

  The second projection area 4141 is detachably attached to the holding frame 4011 so as to be vertically overlapped above the first projection area 4121 in the vertical direction. A substantially rectangular screen formed on a concave surface recessed in the depth direction) is assumed. For example, a predetermined character image or decoration image according to the game effect is appropriately displayed via the second projection means 4147 described later. It shall be set.

  Thus, by making the second projection area 4141 a concave surface recessed in the depth direction of the gaming machine, the image projected on the second projection means 4147 via the second projection means 4147 is removed from the player in the depth direction. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a character image or the like projected on the game effect.

  The projection means is assumed to be a projection device (rear projector) that projects a predetermined image, information about a game, or the like onto the projection area, and is provided on the main body frame 4001 provided with the first projection area 4121 and the second projection area 4141. It is provided in the holding frame 4011 arranged on the rear side.

  One projection unit is provided for each of the first projection region 4121 and the second projection region 4141, and a projection device (lower projection device) provided corresponding to the first projection region 4121 is provided. The projection apparatus (upper projection apparatus) provided corresponding to the first projection means 4143 and the second projection area 4141 will be referred to as second projection means 4147 for convenience.

  The projection means used in this modification is assumed to be a well-known general rear projector (projection apparatus) capable of projecting various games-related images and information on the projection area. In particular, the first projection means 143 is used as the projection means. In this case, a projection device (rear projector) capable of performing notification related to the game progress by changing the light emission mode by changing the projection light passing through the through-hole provided in the projection area according to the game progress. It can be employed and is disposed at a predetermined position of the holding frame 4011.

  The first projection means 4143 is held in a downwardly inclined shape with the projection lens 4143a lowered rearward via the horizontal frame 4015 of the holding frame 4011. That is, the projection lens 4143a is held in a direction opposite to the direction of the first projection region 4121. Then, a configuration is adopted in which the projection light is reflected by the reflecting mirror 4145 provided with a predetermined angle of inclination through the fixed base 4013 attached to the holding frame 4011 in an inclined manner and projected onto the first projection region 4121. .

  The second projection unit 4147 is held via the horizontal frame 4017 of the holding frame 4011 so that the projection lens 4147a is directly opposed to the second projection region 4141. In other words, the second projecting unit 4147 employs a form that projects directly onto the second projection area 4141. In FIG. 109, reference numeral 4200 indicates the optical paths (ideal optical paths) of the first projection means 4143 and the second projection means 4147, and the first projection region 4121 is the optical path of the first projection means 4143. The second projection area 4141 is provided in the optical path 4200 of the second projection means 4147.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above modification is configured to make the game board as small as possible and to secure a large display area outside the game board. When such a configuration is adopted, the player mainly looks at the effect in the display area rather than rolling the game ball on the game board (game area), and is less likely to see the rolling game ball. It is thought that is not directed. On the other hand, in such a gaming machine, when a video is projected onto a game ball (or in the vicinity of the game ball), a player who notices the video moves his / her line of sight to the game ball. Conceivable. As a result, in a normal gaming machine (such as a gaming machine having a relatively large gaming board or a gaming machine having a display device in the center of the gaming board), the gaming ball (or the vicinity of the gaming ball) It is possible to make the player feel surprised in that the performance is performed in a place where the player is not conscious (compared to the case where the same performance is performed), and the effect of the performance can be enhanced. .

  In particular, based on the effect obtained by displaying the video (game ball movement specified by the camera video analysis process (see FIG. 31)) in the display area and the result of the camera video analysis process (see FIG. 31) obtained by camera shooting In the case where an effect (for example, a V winning success effect) to be executed in the display area is performed in the display area, the movement of the game ball is precisely displayed, or a sense of realism is created in the effect. can do. In addition, when performing an effect using video obtained by camera shooting, it is not necessary to store video data for the effect in advance, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load for the effect. As an effect using video obtained by camera shooting, for example, a game ball is a predetermined area (for example, a V winning area shown in FIG. 90 (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D)). When the player enters the ball, an effect can be given in which a replay video of the ball is played based on the movement of the game ball specified by the camera video analysis process (see FIG. 31). If the replay video is played back in slow motion, the player can carefully check the movement of the game ball up to the pitch. At that time, if the moving image is played back in an enlarged manner in the vicinity of the area where the game ball enters, it is possible to show the game ball entering more easily.

  However, even in the configuration such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification, a display area may be provided near the center of the game board (game area). Thereby, while performing an effect in the display area or displaying game information such as a game result, separately performing an effect of projecting an image on the game ball (or the vicinity of the game ball) It is possible to synergize the image display in the display area and the effect on the game ball (or the vicinity of the game ball), and an improvement in the effect can be expected.

<Appendix (Others)>
Conventionally, identification information is displayed on the display area of the variable display device when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when the game ball has passed through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Variable display control means is provided for performing variable display control and performing control for deriving and displaying identification information for which variable display is being performed, which is advantageous to the player when the identification information that is derived and displayed has a predetermined combination. 2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines are known that shift to a big hit game state (so-called “hit”) (see, for example, JP 2013-13801 A).

  However, since the conventional pachinko gaming machine does not have the configuration and function as the gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, and it aims at providing the game machine which can aim at the improvement of interest.

  As described above, in the first to seventh embodiments, the gaming machine that does not include the projector has been described, and in the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine that includes the projector has been described. Of course, the gaming machine according to the first to seventh embodiments may also include the projector as described in the eighth embodiment. In the second embodiment, a pachislot machine is described, and in other embodiments, a pachinko machine is described. However, the items described in the second embodiment can be applied to other embodiments. On the contrary, the matters described in the other embodiments can be applied to the second embodiment. For example, the present invention can be applied to a pachislot gaming machine as described in the second embodiment, and the pachislot gaming machine may include a projector as described in the eighth embodiment. The configurations described in the first to eighth embodiments can be arbitrarily combined as appropriate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the liquid crystal display device 13 provides an effect of visualizing the movement of the game ball based on the position information of the game ball obtained as a result of the tracking process. In the present invention, as described above, the image obtained by the camera photographing (the movement of the game ball specified by the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31)) may be displayed as it is on the display device. . At that time, the movement of the game ball being tracked is displayed on the display device, and the game ball that has been tracked (game ball with the ID released) is erased from the display on the display device. Also good. When the present invention is applied to a gaming machine equipped with a projector as described above, a screen capable of displaying an image projected by the projector is provided, and an image obtained by camera shooting (camera image analysis processing ( The movement of the game ball specified in FIG. 31) may be displayed on the screen.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which a game ball in a pachinko gaming machine and a medal used for a pachislot gaming machine are tracked. The tracked object in the present invention is not limited to these, and may be a pseudo sphere different from the game ball, another accessory, or a decorative member. Further, instead of an object, a person (such as a player or a game hall manager) may be a tracking target. In this specification, “object” including a person is described.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball is tracked in a pachinko gaming machine, the position of the game ball is represented by the position coordinates of the center of gravity of the game ball (for example, coordinates on the XY orthogonal coordinate plane shown in FIG. 67). Explained. In this specification, a game ball (or other tracking target as described above) is an entity having a certain area on a ball position image (two-dimensional plane), and the term “center of gravity” is The center of gravity on the dimensional plane, that is, the center of gravity when assuming that the figure (in the case of a game ball) is made of a thin material with uniform density (weight is proportional to the area) It means the center of gravity in the meaning, the so-called geometric center of gravity. The position of the game ball (tracked object) is not limited to the center of gravity, and can be expressed using any point on the tracked object. For example, when light reflected on the tracking object is detected as the tracking object on the image, the position of the tracking object may be represented by the center of the light spot. When the tracking target object is a polygon in front view, the position of the tracking target object may be represented by the midpoint of one side (for example, the longest side). Moreover, it is good also as using position coordinates, such as an upper end part of a tracking target object, a lower end part, a left end part, and a right end part. In addition, when the tracking target is photographed from a plurality of angles, or from an oblique angle, the position of the tracking target may be represented by three-dimensional coordinates instead of two-dimensional coordinates. In this case, for example, the position of the tracking object may be expressed with reference to a point (center) that is equidistant from each vertex when the tracking object is captured in three dimensions.

  In the above-described embodiment, the position of the vanishing point (see FIG. 48A) is also described by the position coordinates of the center of gravity. However, the position of the vanishing point is also the same as the game ball (tracking target). In addition to the center of gravity, it can be expressed using any point at the disappearance point. In the above-described embodiment, the vanishing point has been described on the assumption that the vanishing point has the same size as the game ball (the game ball that triggered the vanishing point setting) on the image. The size of the point may be different from the size of the tracked object. For example, the size of the disappearance point is unified even if the size of the tracking object is not uniform and there is variation between objects (depending on the area and volume of the tracking object) By increasing or decreasing the size of the disappearance point), it is possible to accurately grasp the disappearance point existing in the disappearance detection area (see FIG. 48B). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the detection of overlap has been described as performing determination based on the overlapping portion of the game balls (see FIG. 48C) instead of the disappearance point. The determination may be made based on the portion. Also in this case, by unifying the size of the disappearance point (increasing or decreasing the size of the disappearance point according to the area or volume of the tracking object), the overlap detection region (see FIG. 48C) is obtained. It is possible to accurately grasp the existing overlap (overlapping part).

  In the embodiment described above, various signals such as an error signal (steps S1310 and S1318 in FIG. 65, steps S2358 and S2364 in FIG. 84, steps S2402 and S2405 in FIG. 85, steps S3103 and S3106 in FIG. 88). , Step S3109, step S3112, step S3115, step S3704 in FIG. 96, etc.) have been described as being transmitted to the hall computer. However, these signals may be transmitted to gaming devices other than the hall computer. . Examples of the gaming apparatus other than the hall computer include a sand, a data display, an island computer, a representative lamp, an outbox, and the like. Note that the number of game balls used by the player in the game (so-called “out number”) may be counted in the outbox.

  The first embodiment to the eighth embodiment have been described as the embodiments of the present invention. However, the embodiments are merely illustrated as specific examples, and the present invention is not particularly limited. The design can be appropriately changed. The effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are only the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

  Further, in the above detailed description, the characteristic portions have been mainly described so that the present invention can be easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description above, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application is various. The terms and terminology used in the present specification are used to accurately describe the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Moreover, it would be easy for those skilled in the art to infer other configurations, systems, methods, and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in this specification. Accordingly, the description of the claims should be regarded as including an equivalent configuration without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. The purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents and essence of this application by patent offices and general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a quick determination through a simple survey. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the claims. Moreover, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desired that the interpretation should be made with sufficient consideration of the literatures already disclosed.

  The above detailed description includes processing executed by a computer. The above explanations and expressions are given for the purpose of enabling those skilled in the art to understand the most efficiently. In this specification, each process used for deriving one result should be understood as a process having no self-contradiction. In each process, transmission / reception, recording, and the like of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. In the processing in each processing, such a signal is expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but these are used only for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processes in each process may be described in expressions common to human actions, but the processes described in this specification are executed by various devices in principle. Further, other configurations required for performing each processing are obvious from the above description.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 11 Speaker 13 Liquid crystal display device 13a Display area 23 Direction button 39 Displacement member 53 First big prize opening 54 Second big prize opening 54a Shutter 59A-59E, 59e-59h LED
71 Main CPU
201 Sub CPU
205 Display Control Circuit 206 Audio Control Circuit 207 LED Control Circuit 208 Drive Control Circuit 1000 CCD Camera

(1) a game board (eg, game board 12) having a game area (eg, game area 12a) in which a game ball can move;
A projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, projector unit B);
A photographing device (for example, a CCD camera 1000) arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for performing various production control,
The production control means is
As a moving image obtained by shooting the game area, frame image acquisition means for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S281 in FIG. 31);
Position specifying means for specifying the position of a game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means (for example, the sub CPU 201 executing the processing of steps S284 to S286 in FIG. 31);
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the projection is performed on the one game ball or the game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball. gaming machine according to claim Rukoto that Yusuke image projection means for projecting an image (e.g., sub CPU201 for executing the processing of FIG. 104) and the by the device.

(2) The gaming machine of (1),
The production control means includes
When the position of the game ball does not change in a predetermined number of frame images, the specification of the position of the game ball is ended .

(3) The gaming machine of (1) and (2),
One game ball in the frame image has an area corresponding to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the game ball.

Claims (2)

A game board having a game area in which a game ball can move;
A projection device capable of projecting an image;
A photographing device arranged so as to be capable of photographing the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of a game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquiring means;
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the projection is performed on the one game ball or the game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball. Image projection means for projecting an image by the apparatus;
A gaming machine comprising: The image projection means includes
In accordance with the movement of the one game ball, the projected position of the image is changed over time.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.